summaryrefslogtreecommitdiffstats
path: root/doc/gettext.texi
blob: 79440d4f8e9f80304c8dff2c2225f442f1f6cd31 (plain)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
1459
1460
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285
2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435
2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3039
3040
3041
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3052
3053
3054
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3065
3066
3067
3068
3069
3070
3071
3072
3073
3074
3075
3076
3077
3078
3079
3080
3081
3082
3083
3084
3085
3086
3087
3088
3089
3090
3091
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
3097
3098
3099
3100
3101
3102
3103
3104
3105
3106
3107
3108
3109
3110
3111
3112
3113
3114
3115
3116
3117
3118
3119
3120
3121
3122
3123
3124
3125
3126
3127
3128
3129
3130
3131
3132
3133
3134
3135
3136
3137
3138
3139
3140
3141
3142
3143
3144
3145
3146
3147
3148
3149
3150
3151
3152
3153
3154
3155
3156
3157
3158
3159
3160
3161
3162
3163
3164
3165
3166
3167
3168
3169
3170
3171
3172
3173
3174
3175
3176
3177
3178
3179
3180
3181
3182
3183
3184
3185
3186
3187
3188
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193
3194
3195
3196
3197
3198
3199
3200
3201
3202
3203
3204
3205
3206
3207
3208
3209
3210
3211
3212
3213
3214
3215
3216
3217
3218
3219
3220
3221
3222
3223
3224
3225
3226
3227
3228
3229
3230
3231
3232
3233
3234
3235
3236
3237
3238
3239
3240
3241
3242
3243
3244
3245
3246
3247
3248
3249
3250
3251
3252
3253
3254
3255
3256
3257
3258
3259
3260
3261
3262
3263
3264
3265
3266
3267
3268
3269
3270
3271
3272
3273
3274
3275
3276
3277
3278
3279
3280
3281
3282
3283
3284
3285
3286
3287
3288
3289
3290
3291
3292
3293
3294
3295
3296
3297
3298
3299
3300
3301
3302
3303
3304
3305
3306
3307
3308
3309
3310
3311
3312
3313
3314
3315
3316
3317
3318
3319
3320
3321
3322
3323
3324
3325
3326
3327
3328
3329
3330
3331
3332
3333
3334
3335
3336
3337
3338
3339
3340
3341
3342
3343
3344
3345
3346
3347
3348
3349
3350
3351
3352
3353
3354
3355
3356
3357
3358
3359
3360
3361
3362
3363
3364
3365
3366
3367
3368
3369
3370
3371
3372
3373
3374
3375
3376
3377
3378
3379
3380
3381
3382
3383
3384
3385
3386
3387
3388
3389
3390
3391
3392
3393
3394
3395
3396
3397
3398
3399
3400
3401
3402
3403
3404
3405
3406
3407
3408
3409
3410
3411
3412
3413
3414
3415
3416
3417
3418
3419
3420
3421
3422
3423
3424
3425
3426
3427
3428
3429
3430
3431
3432
3433
3434
3435
3436
3437
3438
3439
3440
3441
3442
3443
3444
3445
3446
3447
3448
3449
3450
3451
3452
3453
3454
3455
3456
3457
3458
3459
3460
3461
3462
3463
3464
3465
3466
3467
3468
3469
3470
3471
3472
3473
3474
3475
3476
3477
3478
3479
3480
3481
3482
3483
3484
3485
3486
3487
3488
3489
3490
3491
3492
3493
3494
3495
3496
3497
3498
3499
3500
3501
3502
3503
3504
3505
3506
3507
3508
3509
3510
3511
3512
3513
3514
3515
3516
3517
3518
3519
3520
3521
3522
3523
3524
3525
3526
3527
3528
3529
3530
3531
3532
3533
3534
3535
3536
3537
3538
3539
3540
3541
3542
3543
3544
3545
3546
3547
3548
3549
3550
3551
3552
3553
3554
3555
3556
3557
3558
3559
3560
3561
3562
3563
3564
3565
3566
3567
3568
3569
3570
3571
3572
3573
3574
3575
3576
3577
3578
3579
3580
3581
3582
3583
3584
3585
3586
3587
3588
3589
3590
3591
3592
3593
3594
3595
3596
3597
3598
3599
3600
3601
3602
3603
3604
3605
3606
3607
3608
3609
3610
3611
3612
3613
3614
3615
3616
3617
3618
3619
3620
3621
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
3628
3629
3630
3631
3632
3633
3634
3635
3636
3637
3638
3639
3640
3641
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3647
3648
3649
3650
3651
3652
3653
3654
3655
3656
3657
3658
3659
3660
3661
3662
3663
3664
3665
3666
3667
3668
3669
3670
3671
3672
3673
3674
3675
3676
3677
3678
3679
3680
3681
3682
3683
3684
3685
3686
3687
3688
3689
3690
3691
3692
3693
3694
3695
3696
3697
3698
3699
3700
3701
3702
3703
3704
3705
3706
3707
3708
3709
3710
3711
3712
3713
3714
3715
3716
3717
3718
3719
3720
3721
3722
3723
3724
3725
3726
3727
3728
3729
3730
3731
3732
3733
3734
3735
3736
3737
3738
3739
3740
3741
3742
3743
3744
3745
3746
3747
3748
3749
3750
3751
3752
3753
3754
3755
3756
3757
3758
3759
3760
3761
3762
3763
3764
3765
3766
3767
3768
3769
3770
3771
3772
3773
3774
3775
3776
3777
3778
3779
3780
3781
3782
3783
3784
3785
3786
3787
3788
3789
3790
3791
3792
3793
3794
3795
3796
3797
3798
3799
3800
3801
3802
3803
3804
3805
3806
3807
3808
3809
3810
3811
3812
3813
3814
3815
3816
3817
3818
3819
3820
3821
3822
3823
3824
3825
3826
3827
3828
3829
3830
3831
3832
3833
3834
3835
3836
3837
3838
3839
3840
3841
3842
3843
3844
3845
3846
3847
3848
3849
3850
3851
3852
3853
3854
3855
3856
3857
3858
3859
3860
3861
3862
3863
3864
3865
3866
3867
3868
3869
3870
3871
3872
3873
3874
3875
3876
3877
3878
3879
3880
3881
3882
3883
3884
3885
3886
3887
3888
3889
3890
3891
3892
3893
3894
3895
3896
3897
3898
3899
3900
3901
3902
3903
3904
3905
3906
3907
3908
3909
3910
3911
3912
3913
3914
3915
3916
3917
3918
3919
3920
3921
3922
3923
3924
3925
3926
3927
3928
3929
3930
3931
3932
3933
3934
3935
3936
3937
3938
3939
3940
3941
3942
3943
3944
3945
3946
3947
3948
3949
3950
3951
3952
3953
3954
3955
3956
3957
3958
3959
3960
3961
3962
3963
3964
3965
3966
3967
3968
3969
3970
3971
3972
3973
3974
3975
3976
3977
3978
3979
3980
3981
3982
3983
3984
3985
3986
3987
3988
3989
3990
3991
3992
3993
3994
3995
3996
3997
3998
3999
4000
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
4010
4011
4012
4013
4014
4015
4016
4017
4018
4019
4020
4021
4022
4023
4024
4025
4026
4027
4028
4029
4030
4031
4032
4033
4034
4035
4036
4037
4038
4039
4040
4041
4042
4043
4044
4045
4046
4047
4048
4049
4050
4051
4052
4053
4054
4055
4056
4057
4058
4059
4060
4061
4062
4063
4064
4065
4066
4067
4068
4069
4070
4071
4072
4073
4074
4075
4076
4077
4078
4079
4080
4081
4082
4083
4084
4085
4086
4087
4088
4089
4090
4091
4092
4093
4094
4095
4096
4097
4098
4099
4100
4101
4102
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
4108
4109
4110
4111
4112
4113
4114
4115
4116
4117
4118
4119
4120
4121
4122
4123
4124
4125
4126
4127
4128
4129
4130
4131
4132
4133
4134
4135
4136
4137
4138
4139
4140
4141
4142
4143
4144
4145
4146
4147
4148
4149
4150
4151
4152
4153
4154
4155
4156
4157
4158
4159
4160
4161
4162
4163
4164
4165
4166
4167
4168
4169
4170
4171
4172
4173
4174
4175
4176
4177
4178
4179
4180
4181
4182
4183
4184
4185
4186
4187
4188
4189
4190
4191
4192
4193
4194
4195
4196
4197
4198
4199
4200
4201
4202
4203
4204
4205
4206
4207
4208
4209
4210
4211
4212
4213
4214
4215
4216
4217
4218
4219
4220
4221
4222
4223
4224
4225
4226
4227
4228
4229
4230
4231
4232
4233
4234
4235
4236
4237
4238
4239
4240
4241
4242
4243
4244
4245
4246
4247
4248
4249
4250
4251
4252
4253
4254
4255
4256
4257
4258
4259
4260
4261
4262
4263
4264
4265
4266
4267
4268
4269
4270
4271
4272
4273
4274
4275
4276
4277
4278
4279
4280
4281
4282
4283
4284
4285
4286
4287
4288
4289
4290
4291
4292
4293
4294
4295
4296
4297
4298
4299
4300
4301
4302
4303
4304
4305
4306
4307
4308
4309
4310
4311
4312
4313
4314
4315
4316
4317
4318
4319
4320
4321
4322
4323
4324
4325
4326
4327
4328
4329
4330
4331
4332
4333
4334
4335
4336
4337
4338
4339
4340
4341
4342
4343
4344
4345
4346
4347
4348
4349
4350
4351
4352
4353
4354
4355
4356
4357
4358
4359
4360
4361
4362
4363
4364
4365
4366
4367
4368
4369
4370
4371
4372
4373
4374
4375
4376
4377
4378
4379
4380
4381
4382
4383
4384
4385
4386
4387
4388
4389
4390
4391
4392
4393
4394
4395
4396
4397
4398
4399
4400
4401
4402
4403
4404
4405
4406
4407
4408
4409
4410
4411
4412
4413
4414
4415
4416
4417
4418
4419
4420
4421
4422
4423
4424
4425
4426
4427
4428
4429
4430
4431
4432
4433
4434
4435
4436
4437
4438
4439
4440
4441
4442
4443
4444
4445
4446
4447
4448
4449
4450
4451
4452
4453
4454
4455
4456
4457
4458
4459
4460
4461
4462
4463
4464
4465
4466
4467
4468
4469
4470
4471
4472
4473
4474
4475
4476
4477
4478
4479
4480
4481
4482
4483
4484
4485
4486
4487
4488
4489
4490
4491
4492
4493
4494
4495
4496
4497
4498
4499
4500
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
4506
4507
4508
4509
4510
4511
4512
4513
4514
4515
4516
4517
4518
4519
4520
4521
4522
4523
4524
4525
4526
4527
4528
4529
4530
4531
4532
4533
4534
4535
4536
4537
4538
4539
4540
4541
4542
4543
4544
4545
4546
4547
4548
4549
4550
4551
4552
4553
4554
4555
4556
4557
4558
4559
4560
4561
4562
4563
4564
4565
4566
4567
4568
4569
4570
4571
4572
4573
4574
4575
4576
4577
4578
4579
4580
4581
4582
4583
4584
4585
4586
4587
4588
4589
4590
4591
4592
4593
4594
4595
4596
4597
4598
4599
4600
4601
4602
4603
4604
4605
4606
4607
4608
4609
4610
4611
4612
4613
4614
4615
4616
4617
4618
4619
4620
4621
4622
4623
4624
4625
4626
4627
4628
4629
4630
4631
4632
4633
4634
4635
4636
4637
4638
4639
4640
4641
4642
4643
4644
4645
4646
4647
4648
4649
4650
4651
4652
4653
4654
4655
4656
4657
4658
4659
4660
4661
4662
4663
4664
4665
4666
4667
4668
4669
4670
4671
4672
4673
4674
4675
4676
4677
4678
4679
4680
4681
4682
4683
4684
4685
4686
4687
4688
4689
4690
4691
4692
4693
4694
4695
4696
4697
4698
4699
4700
4701
4702
4703
4704
4705
4706
4707
4708
4709
4710
4711
4712
4713
4714
4715
4716
4717
4718
4719
4720
4721
4722
4723
4724
4725
4726
4727
4728
4729
4730
4731
4732
4733
4734
4735
4736
4737
4738
4739
4740
4741
4742
4743
4744
4745
4746
4747
4748
4749
4750
4751
4752
4753
4754
4755
4756
4757
4758
4759
4760
4761
4762
4763
4764
4765
4766
4767
4768
4769
4770
4771
4772
4773
4774
4775
4776
4777
4778
4779
4780
4781
4782
4783
4784
4785
4786
4787
4788
4789
4790
4791
4792
4793
4794
4795
4796
4797
4798
4799
4800
4801
4802
4803
4804
4805
4806
4807
4808
4809
4810
4811
4812
4813
4814
4815
4816
4817
4818
4819
4820
4821
4822
4823
4824
4825
4826
4827
4828
4829
4830
4831
4832
4833
4834
4835
4836
4837
4838
4839
4840
4841
4842
4843
4844
4845
4846
4847
4848
4849
4850
4851
4852
4853
4854
4855
4856
4857
4858
4859
4860
4861
4862
4863
4864
4865
4866
4867
4868
4869
4870
4871
4872
4873
4874
4875
4876
4877
4878
4879
4880
4881
4882
4883
4884
4885
4886
4887
4888
4889
4890
4891
4892
4893
4894
4895
4896
4897
4898
4899
4900
4901
4902
4903
4904
4905
4906
4907
4908
4909
4910
4911
4912
4913
4914
4915
4916
4917
4918
4919
4920
4921
4922
4923
4924
4925
4926
4927
4928
4929
4930
4931
4932
4933
4934
4935
4936
4937
4938
4939
4940
4941
4942
4943
4944
4945
4946
4947
4948
4949
4950
4951
4952
4953
4954
4955
4956
4957
4958
4959
4960
4961
4962
4963
4964
4965
4966
4967
4968
4969
4970
4971
4972
4973
4974
4975
4976
4977
4978
4979
4980
4981
4982
4983
4984
4985
4986
4987
4988
4989
4990
4991
4992
4993
4994
4995
4996
4997
4998
4999
5000
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
5006
5007
5008
5009
5010
5011
5012
5013
5014
5015
5016
5017
5018
5019
5020
5021
5022
5023
5024
5025
5026
5027
5028
5029
5030
5031
5032
5033
5034
5035
5036
5037
5038
5039
5040
5041
5042
5043
5044
5045
5046
5047
5048
5049
5050
5051
5052
5053
5054
5055
5056
5057
5058
5059
5060
5061
5062
5063
5064
5065
5066
5067
5068
5069
5070
5071
5072
5073
5074
5075
5076
5077
5078
5079
5080
5081
5082
5083
5084
5085
5086
5087
5088
5089
5090
5091
5092
5093
5094
5095
5096
5097
5098
5099
5100
5101
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
5107
5108
5109
5110
5111
5112
5113
5114
5115
5116
5117
5118
5119
5120
5121
5122
5123
5124
5125
5126
5127
5128
5129
5130
5131
5132
5133
5134
5135
5136
5137
5138
5139
5140
5141
5142
5143
5144
5145
5146
5147
5148
5149
5150
5151
5152
5153
5154
5155
5156
5157
5158
5159
5160
5161
5162
5163
5164
5165
5166
5167
5168
5169
5170
5171
5172
5173
5174
5175
5176
5177
5178
5179
5180
5181
5182
5183
5184
5185
5186
5187
5188
5189
5190
5191
5192
5193
5194
5195
5196
5197
5198
5199
5200
5201
5202
5203
5204
5205
5206
5207
5208
5209
5210
5211
5212
5213
5214
5215
5216
5217
5218
5219
5220
5221
5222
5223
5224
5225
5226
5227
5228
5229
5230
5231
5232
5233
5234
5235
5236
5237
5238
5239
5240
5241
5242
5243
5244
5245
5246
5247
5248
5249
5250
5251
5252
5253
5254
5255
5256
5257
5258
5259
5260
5261
5262
5263
5264
5265
5266
5267
5268
5269
5270
5271
5272
5273
5274
5275
5276
5277
5278
5279
5280
5281
5282
5283
5284
5285
5286
5287
5288
5289
5290
5291
5292
5293
5294
5295
5296
5297
5298
5299
5300
5301
5302
5303
5304
5305
5306
5307
5308
5309
5310
5311
5312
5313
5314
5315
5316
5317
5318
5319
5320
5321
5322
5323
5324
5325
5326
5327
5328
5329
5330
5331
5332
5333
5334
5335
5336
5337
5338
5339
5340
5341
5342
5343
5344
5345
5346
5347
5348
5349
5350
5351
5352
5353
5354
5355
5356
5357
5358
5359
5360
5361
5362
5363
5364
5365
5366
5367
5368
5369
5370
5371
5372
5373
5374
5375
5376
5377
5378
5379
5380
5381
5382
5383
5384
5385
5386
5387
5388
5389
5390
5391
5392
5393
5394
5395
5396
5397
5398
5399
5400
5401
5402
5403
5404
5405
5406
5407
5408
5409
5410
5411
5412
5413
5414
5415
5416
5417
5418
5419
5420
5421
5422
5423
5424
5425
5426
5427
5428
5429
5430
5431
5432
5433
5434
5435
5436
5437
5438
5439
5440
5441
5442
5443
5444
5445
5446
5447
5448
5449
5450
5451
5452
5453
5454
5455
5456
5457
5458
5459
5460
5461
5462
5463
5464
5465
5466
5467
5468
5469
5470
5471
5472
5473
5474
5475
5476
5477
5478
5479
5480
5481
5482
5483
5484
5485
5486
5487
5488
5489
5490
5491
5492
5493
5494
5495
5496
5497
5498
5499
5500
5501
5502
5503
5504
5505
5506
5507
5508
5509
5510
5511
5512
5513
5514
5515
5516
5517
5518
5519
5520
5521
5522
5523
5524
5525
5526
5527
5528
5529
5530
5531
5532
5533
5534
5535
5536
5537
5538
5539
5540
5541
5542
5543
5544
5545
5546
5547
5548
5549
5550
5551
5552
5553
5554
5555
5556
5557
5558
5559
5560
5561
5562
5563
5564
5565
5566
5567
5568
5569
5570
5571
5572
5573
5574
5575
5576
5577
5578
5579
5580
5581
5582
5583
5584
5585
5586
5587
5588
5589
5590
5591
5592
5593
5594
5595
5596
5597
5598
5599
5600
5601
5602
5603
5604
5605
5606
5607
5608
5609
5610
5611
5612
5613
5614
5615
5616
5617
5618
5619
5620
5621
5622
5623
5624
5625
5626
5627
5628
5629
5630
5631
5632
5633
5634
5635
5636
5637
5638
5639
5640
5641
5642
5643
5644
5645
5646
5647
5648
5649
5650
5651
5652
5653
5654
5655
5656
5657
5658
5659
5660
5661
5662
5663
5664
5665
5666
5667
5668
5669
5670
5671
5672
5673
5674
5675
5676
5677
5678
5679
5680
5681
5682
5683
5684
5685
5686
5687
5688
5689
5690
5691
5692
5693
5694
5695
5696
5697
5698
5699
5700
5701
5702
5703
5704
5705
5706
5707
5708
5709
5710
5711
5712
5713
5714
5715
5716
5717
5718
5719
5720
5721
5722
5723
5724
5725
5726
5727
5728
5729
5730
5731
5732
5733
5734
5735
5736
5737
5738
5739
5740
5741
5742
5743
5744
5745
5746
5747
5748
5749
5750
5751
5752
5753
5754
5755
5756
5757
5758
5759
5760
5761
5762
5763
5764
5765
5766
5767
5768
5769
5770
5771
5772
5773
5774
5775
5776
5777
5778
5779
5780
5781
5782
5783
5784
5785
5786
5787
5788
5789
5790
5791
5792
5793
5794
5795
5796
5797
5798
5799
5800
5801
5802
5803
5804
5805
5806
5807
5808
5809
5810
5811
5812
5813
5814
5815
5816
5817
5818
5819
5820
5821
5822
5823
5824
5825
5826
5827
5828
5829
5830
5831
5832
5833
5834
5835
5836
5837
5838
5839
5840
5841
5842
5843
5844
5845
5846
5847
5848
5849
5850
5851
5852
5853
5854
5855
5856
5857
5858
5859
5860
5861
5862
5863
5864
5865
5866
5867
5868
5869
5870
5871
5872
5873
5874
5875
5876
5877
5878
5879
5880
5881
5882
5883
5884
5885
5886
5887
5888
5889
5890
5891
5892
5893
5894
5895
5896
5897
5898
5899
5900
5901
5902
5903
5904
5905
5906
5907
5908
5909
5910
5911
5912
5913
5914
5915
5916
5917
5918
5919
5920
5921
5922
5923
5924
5925
5926
5927
5928
5929
5930
5931
5932
5933
5934
5935
5936
5937
5938
5939
5940
5941
5942
5943
5944
5945
5946
5947
5948
5949
5950
5951
5952
5953
5954
5955
5956
5957
5958
5959
5960
5961
5962
5963
5964
5965
5966
5967
5968
5969
5970
5971
5972
5973
5974
5975
5976
5977
5978
5979
5980
5981
5982
5983
5984
5985
5986
5987
5988
5989
5990
5991
5992
5993
5994
5995
5996
5997
5998
5999
6000
6001
6002
6003
6004
6005
6006
6007
6008
6009
6010
6011
6012
6013
6014
6015
6016
6017
6018
6019
6020
6021
6022
6023
6024
6025
6026
6027
6028
6029
6030
6031
6032
6033
6034
6035
6036
6037
6038
6039
6040
6041
6042
6043
6044
6045
6046
6047
6048
6049
6050
6051
6052
6053
6054
6055
6056
6057
6058
6059
6060
6061
6062
6063
6064
6065
6066
6067
6068
6069
6070
6071
6072
6073
6074
6075
6076
6077
6078
6079
6080
6081
6082
6083
6084
6085
6086
6087
6088
6089
6090
6091
6092
6093
6094
6095
6096
6097
6098
6099
6100
6101
6102
6103
6104
6105
6106
6107
6108
6109
6110
6111
6112
6113
6114
6115
6116
6117
6118
6119
6120
6121
6122
6123
6124
6125
6126
6127
6128
6129
6130
6131
6132
6133
6134
6135
6136
6137
6138
6139
6140
6141
6142
6143
6144
6145
6146
6147
6148
6149
6150
6151
6152
6153
6154
6155
6156
6157
6158
6159
6160
6161
6162
6163
6164
6165
6166
6167
6168
6169
6170
6171
6172
6173
6174
6175
6176
6177
6178
6179
6180
6181
6182
6183
6184
6185
6186
6187
6188
6189
6190
6191
6192
6193
6194
6195
6196
6197
6198
6199
6200
6201
6202
6203
6204
6205
6206
6207
6208
6209
6210
6211
6212
6213
6214
6215
6216
6217
6218
6219
6220
6221
6222
6223
6224
6225
6226
6227
6228
6229
6230
6231
6232
6233
6234
6235
6236
6237
6238
6239
6240
6241
6242
6243
6244
6245
6246
6247
6248
6249
6250
6251
6252
6253
6254
6255
6256
6257
6258
6259
6260
6261
6262
6263
6264
6265
6266
6267
6268
6269
6270
6271
6272
6273
6274
6275
6276
6277
6278
6279
6280
6281
6282
6283
6284
6285
6286
6287
6288
6289
6290
6291
6292
6293
6294
6295
6296
6297
6298
6299
6300
6301
6302
6303
6304
6305
6306
6307
6308
6309
6310
6311
6312
6313
6314
6315
6316
6317
6318
6319
6320
6321
6322
6323
6324
6325
6326
6327
6328
6329
6330
6331
6332
6333
6334
6335
6336
6337
6338
6339
6340
6341
6342
6343
6344
6345
6346
6347
6348
6349
6350
6351
6352
6353
6354
6355
6356
6357
6358
6359
6360
6361
6362
6363
6364
6365
6366
6367
6368
6369
6370
6371
6372
6373
6374
6375
6376
6377
6378
6379
6380
6381
6382
6383
6384
6385
6386
6387
6388
6389
6390
6391
6392
6393
6394
6395
6396
6397
6398
6399
6400
6401
6402
6403
6404
6405
6406
6407
6408
6409
6410
6411
6412
6413
6414
6415
6416
6417
6418
6419
6420
6421
6422
6423
6424
6425
6426
6427
6428
6429
6430
6431
6432
6433
6434
6435
6436
6437
6438
6439
6440
6441
6442
6443
6444
6445
6446
6447
6448
6449
6450
6451
6452
6453
6454
6455
6456
6457
6458
6459
6460
6461
6462
6463
6464
6465
6466
6467
6468
6469
6470
6471
6472
6473
6474
6475
6476
6477
6478
6479
6480
6481
6482
6483
6484
6485
6486
6487
6488
6489
6490
6491
6492
6493
6494
6495
6496
6497
6498
6499
6500
6501
6502
6503
6504
6505
6506
6507
6508
6509
6510
6511
6512
6513
6514
6515
6516
6517
6518
6519
6520
6521
6522
6523
6524
6525
6526
6527
6528
6529
6530
6531
6532
6533
6534
6535
6536
6537
6538
6539
6540
6541
6542
6543
6544
6545
6546
6547
6548
6549
6550
6551
6552
6553
6554
6555
6556
6557
6558
6559
6560
6561
6562
6563
6564
6565
6566
6567
6568
6569
6570
6571
6572
6573
6574
6575
6576
6577
6578
6579
6580
6581
6582
6583
6584
6585
6586
6587
6588
6589
6590
6591
6592
6593
6594
6595
6596
6597
6598
6599
6600
6601
6602
6603
6604
6605
6606
6607
6608
6609
6610
6611
6612
6613
6614
6615
6616
6617
6618
6619
6620
6621
6622
6623
6624
6625
6626
6627
6628
6629
6630
6631
6632
6633
6634
6635
6636
6637
6638
6639
6640
6641
6642
6643
6644
6645
6646
6647
6648
6649
6650
6651
6652
6653
6654
6655
6656
6657
6658
6659
6660
6661
6662
6663
6664
6665
6666
6667
6668
6669
6670
6671
6672
6673
6674
6675
6676
6677
6678
6679
6680
6681
6682
6683
6684
6685
6686
6687
6688
6689
6690
6691
6692
6693
6694
6695
6696
6697
6698
6699
6700
6701
6702
6703
6704
6705
6706
6707
6708
6709
6710
6711
6712
6713
6714
6715
6716
6717
6718
6719
6720
6721
6722
6723
6724
6725
6726
6727
6728
6729
6730
6731
6732
6733
6734
6735
6736
6737
6738
6739
6740
6741
6742
6743
6744
6745
6746
6747
6748
6749
6750
6751
6752
6753
6754
6755
6756
6757
6758
6759
6760
6761
6762
6763
6764
6765
6766
6767
6768
6769
6770
6771
6772
6773
6774
6775
6776
6777
6778
6779
6780
6781
6782
6783
6784
6785
6786
6787
6788
6789
6790
6791
6792
6793
6794
6795
6796
6797
6798
6799
6800
6801
6802
6803
6804
6805
6806
6807
6808
6809
6810
6811
6812
6813
6814
6815
6816
6817
6818
6819
6820
6821
6822
6823
6824
6825
6826
6827
6828
6829
6830
6831
6832
6833
6834
6835
6836
6837
6838
6839
6840
6841
6842
6843
6844
6845
6846
6847
6848
6849
6850
6851
6852
6853
6854
6855
6856
6857
6858
6859
6860
6861
6862
6863
6864
6865
6866
6867
6868
6869
6870
6871
6872
6873
6874
6875
6876
6877
6878
6879
6880
6881
6882
6883
6884
6885
6886
6887
6888
6889
6890
6891
6892
6893
6894
6895
6896
6897
6898
6899
6900
6901
6902
6903
6904
6905
6906
6907
6908
6909
6910
6911
6912
6913
6914
6915
6916
6917
6918
6919
6920
6921
6922
6923
6924
6925
6926
6927
6928
6929
6930
6931
6932
6933
6934
6935
6936
6937
6938
6939
6940
6941
6942
6943
6944
6945
6946
6947
6948
6949
6950
6951
6952
6953
6954
6955
6956
6957
6958
6959
6960
6961
6962
6963
6964
6965
6966
6967
6968
6969
6970
6971
6972
6973
6974
6975
6976
6977
6978
6979
6980
6981
6982
6983
6984
6985
6986
6987
6988
6989
6990
6991
6992
6993
6994
6995
6996
6997
6998
6999
7000
7001
7002
7003
7004
7005
7006
7007
7008
7009
7010
7011
7012
7013
7014
7015
7016
7017
7018
7019
7020
7021
7022
7023
7024
7025
7026
7027
7028
7029
7030
7031
7032
7033
7034
7035
7036
7037
7038
7039
7040
7041
7042
7043
7044
7045
7046
7047
7048
7049
7050
7051
7052
7053
7054
7055
7056
7057
7058
7059
7060
7061
7062
7063
7064
7065
7066
7067
7068
7069
7070
7071
7072
7073
7074
7075
7076
7077
7078
7079
7080
7081
7082
7083
7084
7085
7086
7087
7088
7089
7090
7091
7092
7093
7094
7095
7096
7097
7098
7099
7100
7101
7102
7103
7104
7105
7106
7107
7108
7109
7110
7111
7112
7113
7114
7115
7116
7117
7118
7119
7120
7121
7122
7123
7124
7125
7126
7127
7128
7129
7130
7131
7132
7133
7134
7135
7136
7137
7138
7139
7140
7141
7142
7143
7144
7145
7146
7147
7148
7149
7150
7151
7152
7153
7154
7155
7156
7157
7158
7159
7160
7161
7162
7163
7164
7165
7166
7167
7168
7169
7170
7171
7172
7173
7174
7175
7176
7177
7178
7179
7180
7181
7182
7183
7184
7185
7186
7187
7188
7189
7190
7191
7192
7193
7194
7195
7196
7197
7198
7199
7200
7201
7202
7203
7204
7205
7206
7207
7208
7209
7210
7211
7212
7213
7214
7215
7216
7217
7218
7219
7220
7221
7222
7223
7224
7225
7226
7227
7228
7229
7230
7231
7232
7233
7234
7235
7236
7237
7238
7239
7240
7241
7242
7243
7244
7245
7246
7247
7248
7249
7250
7251
7252
7253
7254
7255
7256
7257
7258
7259
7260
7261
7262
7263
7264
7265
7266
7267
7268
7269
7270
7271
7272
7273
7274
7275
7276
7277
7278
7279
7280
7281
7282
7283
7284
7285
7286
7287
7288
7289
7290
7291
7292
7293
7294
7295
7296
7297
7298
7299
7300
7301
7302
7303
7304
7305
7306
7307
7308
7309
7310
7311
7312
7313
7314
7315
7316
7317
7318
7319
7320
7321
7322
7323
7324
7325
7326
7327
7328
7329
7330
7331
7332
7333
7334
7335
7336
7337
7338
7339
7340
7341
7342
7343
7344
7345
7346
7347
7348
7349
7350
7351
7352
7353
7354
7355
7356
7357
7358
7359
7360
7361
7362
7363
7364
7365
7366
7367
7368
7369
7370
7371
7372
7373
7374
7375
7376
7377
7378
7379
7380
7381
7382
7383
7384
7385
7386
7387
7388
7389
7390
7391
7392
7393
7394
7395
7396
7397
7398
7399
7400
7401
7402
7403
7404
7405
7406
7407
7408
7409
7410
7411
7412
7413
7414
7415
7416
7417
7418
7419
7420
7421
7422
7423
7424
7425
7426
7427
7428
7429
7430
7431
7432
7433
7434
7435
7436
7437
7438
7439
7440
7441
7442
7443
7444
7445
7446
7447
7448
7449
7450
7451
7452
7453
7454
7455
7456
7457
7458
7459
7460
7461
7462
7463
7464
7465
7466
7467
7468
7469
7470
7471
7472
7473
7474
7475
7476
7477
7478
7479
7480
7481
7482
7483
7484
7485
7486
7487
7488
7489
7490
7491
7492
7493
7494
7495
7496
7497
7498
7499
7500
7501
7502
7503
7504
7505
7506
7507
7508
7509
7510
7511
7512
7513
7514
7515
7516
7517
7518
7519
7520
7521
7522
7523
7524
7525
7526
7527
7528
7529
7530
7531
7532
7533
7534
7535
7536
7537
7538
7539
7540
7541
7542
7543
7544
7545
7546
7547
7548
7549
7550
7551
7552
7553
7554
7555
7556
7557
7558
7559
7560
7561
7562
7563
7564
7565
7566
7567
7568
7569
7570
7571
7572
7573
7574
7575
7576
7577
7578
7579
7580
7581
7582
7583
7584
7585
7586
7587
7588
7589
7590
7591
7592
7593
7594
7595
7596
7597
7598
7599
7600
7601
7602
7603
7604
7605
7606
7607
7608
7609
7610
7611
7612
7613
7614
7615
7616
7617
7618
7619
7620
7621
7622
7623
7624
7625
7626
7627
7628
7629
7630
7631
7632
7633
7634
7635
7636
7637
7638
7639
7640
7641
7642
7643
7644
7645
7646
7647
7648
7649
7650
7651
7652
7653
7654
7655
7656
7657
7658
7659
7660
7661
7662
7663
7664
7665
7666
7667
7668
7669
7670
7671
7672
7673
7674
7675
7676
7677
7678
7679
7680
7681
7682
7683
7684
7685
7686
7687
7688
7689
7690
7691
7692
7693
7694
7695
7696
7697
7698
7699
7700
7701
7702
7703
7704
7705
\input texinfo          @c -*-texinfo-*-
@c %**start of header
@setfilename gettext.info
@settitle GNU @code{gettext} utilities
@finalout
@c Indices:
@c   am = autoconf macro  @amindex
@c   cp = concept         @cindex
@c   ef = emacs function  @efindex
@c   em = emacs mode      @emindex
@c   ev = emacs variable  @evindex
@c   fn = function        @findex
@c   kw = keyword         @kwindex
@c   op = option          @opindex
@c   pg = program         @pindex
@c   vr = variable        @vindex
@c Unused predefined indices:
@c   tp = type            @tindex
@c   ky = keystroke       @kindex
@defcodeindex am
@defcodeindex ef
@defindex em
@defcodeindex ev
@defcodeindex kw
@defcodeindex op
@syncodeindex ef em
@syncodeindex ev em
@syncodeindex fn cp
@syncodeindex kw cp
@c %**end of header

@include version.texi

@dircategory GNU Gettext Utilities
@direntry
* Gettext: (gettext).                           GNU gettext utilities.
* gettextize: (gettext)gettextize Invocation.   Prepare a package for gettext.
* msgfmt: (gettext)msgfmt Invocation.           Make MO files out of PO files.
* msgmerge: (gettext)msgmerge Invocation.       Update two PO files into one.
* xgettext: (gettext)xgettext Invocation.       Extract strings into a PO file.
@end direntry

@ifinfo
This file provides documentation for GNU @code{gettext} utilities.
It also serves as a reference for the free Translation Project.

Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
are preserved on all copies.

@ignore
Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).

@end ignore
Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
notice identical to this one.

Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved
by the Foundation.
@end ifinfo

@titlepage
@title GNU gettext tools, version @value{VERSION}
@subtitle Native Language Support Library and Tools
@subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{UPDATED}
@author Ulrich Drepper
@author Jim Meyering
@author Fran@,{c}ois Pinard
@author Bruno Haible

@page
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
Copyright @copyright{} 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
are preserved on all copies.

Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
notice identical to this one.

Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved
by the Foundation.
@end titlepage

@ifinfo
@node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir)
@top GNU @code{gettext} utilities

@menu
* Introduction::                Introduction
* Basics::                      PO Files and PO Mode Basics
* Sources::                     Preparing Program Sources
* Template::                    Making the PO Template File
* Creating::                    Creating a New PO File
* Updating::                    Updating Existing PO Files
* Manipulating::                Manipulating PO Files
* Binaries::                    Producing Binary MO Files
* Users::                       The User's View
* Programmers::                 The Programmer's View
* Translators::                 The Translator's View
* Maintainers::                 The Maintainer's View
* Programming Languages::       Other Programming Languages
* Conclusion::                  Concluding Remarks

* Language Codes::              ISO 639 language codes
* Country Codes::               ISO 3166 country codes

* Program Index::               Index of Programs
* Option Index::                Index of Command-Line Options
* Variable Index::              Index of Environment Variables
* PO Mode Index::               Index of Emacs PO Mode Commands
* Autoconf Macro Index::        Index of Autoconf Macros
* Index::                       General Index

@detailmenu
 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---

Introduction

* Why::                         The Purpose of GNU @code{gettext}
* Concepts::                    I18n, L10n, and Such
* Aspects::                     Aspects in Native Language Support
* Files::                       Files Conveying Translations
* Overview::                    Overview of GNU @code{gettext}

PO Files and PO Mode Basics

* Installation::                Completing GNU @code{gettext} Installation
* PO Files::                    The Format of PO Files
* Main PO Commands::            Main Commands
* Entry Positioning::           Entry Positioning
* Normalizing::                 Normalizing Strings in Entries

Preparing Program Sources

* Triggering::                  Triggering @code{gettext} Operations
* Mark Keywords::               How Marks Appear in Sources
* Marking::                     Marking Translatable Strings
* c-format::                    Telling something about the following string
* Special cases::               Special Cases of Translatable Strings

Making the PO Template File

* xgettext Invocation::         Invoking the @code{xgettext} Program

Creating a New PO File

* msginit Invocation::          Invoking the @code{msginit} Program
* Header Entry::                Filling in the Header Entry

Updating Existing PO Files

* msgmerge Invocation::         Invoking the @code{msgmerge} Program
* Translated Entries::          Translated Entries
* Fuzzy Entries::               Fuzzy Entries
* Untranslated Entries::        Untranslated Entries
* Obsolete Entries::            Obsolete Entries
* Modifying Translations::      Modifying Translations
* Modifying Comments::          Modifying Comments
* Subedit::                     Mode for Editing Translations
* C Sources Context::           C Sources Context
* Auxiliary::                   Consulting Auxiliary PO Files
* Compendium::                  Using Translation Compendia

Using Translation Compendia

* Creating Compendia::          Merging translations for later use
* Using Compendia::             Using older translations if they fit

Manipulating PO Files

* msgcat Invocation::           Invoking the @code{msgcat} Program
* msgconv Invocation::          Invoking the @code{msgconv} Program
* msggrep Invocation::          Invoking the @code{msggrep} Program
* msgfilter Invocation::        Invoking the @code{msgfilter} Program
* msguniq Invocation::          Invoking the @code{msguniq} Program
* msgcomm Invocation::          Invoking the @code{msgcomm} Program
* msgcmp Invocation::           Invoking the @code{msgcmp} Program
* msgattrib Invocation::        Invoking the @code{msgattrib} Program
* msgen Invocation::            Invoking the @code{msgen} Program
* msgexec Invocation::          Invoking the @code{msgexec} Program

Producing Binary MO Files

* msgfmt Invocation::           Invoking the @code{msgfmt} Program
* msgunfmt Invocation::         Invoking the @code{msgunfmt} Program
* MO Files::                    The Format of GNU MO Files

The User's View

* Matrix::                      The Current @file{ABOUT-NLS} Matrix
* Installers::                  Magic for Installers
* End Users::                   Magic for End Users

The Programmer's View

* catgets::                     About @code{catgets}
* gettext::                     About @code{gettext}
* Comparison::                  Comparing the two interfaces
* Using libintl.a::             Using libintl.a in own programs
* gettext grok::                Being a @code{gettext} grok
* Temp Programmers::            Temporary Notes for the Programmers Chapter

About @code{catgets}

* Interface to catgets::        The interface
* Problems with catgets::       Problems with the @code{catgets} interface?!

About @code{gettext}

* Interface to gettext::        The interface
* Ambiguities::                 Solving ambiguities
* Locating Catalogs::           Locating message catalog files
* Charset conversion::          How to request conversion to Unicode
* Plural forms::                Additional functions for handling plurals
* GUI program problems::        Another technique for solving ambiguities
* Optimized gettext::           Optimization of the *gettext functions

Temporary Notes for the Programmers Chapter

* Temp Implementations::        Temporary - Two Possible Implementations
* Temp catgets::                Temporary - About @code{catgets}
* Temp WSI::                    Temporary - Why a single implementation
* Temp Notes::                  Temporary - Notes

The Translator's View

* Trans Intro 0::               Introduction 0
* Trans Intro 1::               Introduction 1
* Discussions::                 Discussions
* Organization::                Organization
* Information Flow::            Information Flow

Organization

* Central Coordination::        Central Coordination
* National Teams::              National Teams
* Mailing Lists::               Mailing Lists

National Teams

* Sub-Cultures::                Sub-Cultures
* Organizational Ideas::        Organizational Ideas

The Maintainer's View

* Flat and Non-Flat::           Flat or Non-Flat Directory Structures
* Prerequisites::               Prerequisite Works
* gettextize Invocation::       Invoking the @code{gettextize} Program
* Adjusting Files::             Files You Must Create or Alter
* autoconf macros::             Autoconf macros for use in @file{configure.in}

Files You Must Create or Alter

* po/POTFILES.in::              @file{POTFILES.in} in @file{po/}
* po/LINGUAS::                  @file{LINGUAS} in @file{po/}
* po/Makevars::                 @file{Makefile} pieces in @file{po/}
* configure.in::                @file{configure.in} at top level
* config.guess::                @file{config.guess}, @file{config.sub} at top level
* aclocal::                     @file{aclocal.m4} at top level
* acconfig::                    @file{acconfig.h} at top level
* Makefile::                    @file{Makefile.in} at top level
* src/Makefile::                @file{Makefile.in} in @file{src/}
* lib/gettext.h::               @file{gettext.h} in @file{lib/}

Autoconf macros for use in @file{configure.in}

* AM_GNU_GETTEXT::              AM_GNU_GETTEXT in @file{gettext.m4}
* AM_ICONV::                    AM_ICONV in @file{iconv.m4}

Other Programming Languages

* Language Implementors::       The Language Implementor's View
* Programmers for other Languages::  The Programmer's View
* Translators for other Languages::  The Translator's View
* Maintainers for other Languages::  The Maintainer's View
* List of Programming Languages::  Individual Programming Languages
* List of Data Formats::        Internationalizable Data

Individual Programming Languages

* C::                           C, C++, Objective C
* sh::                          sh - Shell Script
* bash::                        bash - Bourne-Again Shell Script
* Python::                      Python
* Common Lisp::                 GNU clisp - Common Lisp
* clisp C::                     GNU clisp C sources
* Emacs Lisp::                  Emacs Lisp
* librep::                      librep
* Smalltalk::                   GNU Smalltalk
* Java::                        Java
* gawk::                        GNU awk
* Pascal::                      Pascal - Free Pascal Compiler
* wxWindows::                   wxWindows library
* YCP::                         YCP - YaST2 scripting language
* Tcl::                         Tcl - Tk's scripting language
* Perl::                        Perl
* PHP::                         PHP Hypertext Preprocessor
* Pike::                        Pike

Internationalizable Data

* POT::                         POT - Portable Object Template
* RST::                         Resource String Table
* Glade::                       Glade - GNOME user interface description

Concluding Remarks

* History::                     History of GNU @code{gettext}
* References::                  Related Readings

@end detailmenu
@end menu

@end ifinfo

@node Introduction, Basics, Top, Top
@chapter Introduction

@quotation
This manual is still in @emph{DRAFT} state.  Some sections are still
empty, or almost.  We keep merging material from other sources
(essentially e-mail folders) while the proper integration of this
material is delayed.
@end quotation

@cindex sex
@cindex he, she, and they
@cindex she, he, and they
In this manual, we use @emph{he} when speaking of the programmer or
maintainer, @emph{she} when speaking of the translator, and @emph{they}
when speaking of the installers or end users of the translated program.
This is only a convenience for clarifying the documentation.  It is
@emph{absolutely} not meant to imply that some roles are more appropriate
to males or females.  Besides, as you might guess, GNU @code{gettext}
is meant to be useful for people using computers, whatever their sex,
race, religion or nationality!

This chapter explains the goals sought in the creation
of GNU @code{gettext} and the free Translation Project.
Then, it explains a few broad concepts around
Native Language Support, and positions message translation with regard
to other aspects of national and cultural variance, as they apply to
to programs.  It also surveys those files used to convey the
translations.  It explains how the various tools interact in the
initial generation of these files, and later, how the maintenance
cycle should usually operate.

@cindex bug report address
Please send suggestions and corrections to:

@example
@group
@r{Internet address:}
    bug-gnu-gettext@@gnu.org
@end group
@end example

@noindent
Please include the manual's edition number and update date in your messages.

@menu
* Why::                         The Purpose of GNU @code{gettext}
* Concepts::                    I18n, L10n, and Such
* Aspects::                     Aspects in Native Language Support
* Files::                       Files Conveying Translations
* Overview::                    Overview of GNU @code{gettext}
@end menu

@node Why, Concepts, Introduction, Introduction
@section The Purpose of GNU @code{gettext}

Usually, programs are written and documented in English, and use
English at execution time to interact with users.  This is true
not only of GNU software, but also of a great deal of commercial
and free software.  Using a common language is quite handy for
communication between developers, maintainers and users from all
countries.  On the other hand, most people are less comfortable with
English than with their own native language, and would prefer to
use their mother tongue for day to day's work, as far as possible.
Many would simply @emph{love} to see their computer screen showing
a lot less of English, and far more of their own language.

@cindex Translation Project
However, to many people, this dream might appear so far fetched that
they may believe it is not even worth spending time thinking about
it.  They have no confidence at all that the dream might ever
become true.  Yet some have not lost hope, and have organized themselves.
The Translation Project is a formalization of this hope into a
workable structure, which has a good chance to get all of us nearer
the achievement of a truly multi-lingual set of programs.

GNU @code{gettext} is an important step for the Translation Project,
as it is an asset on which we may build many other steps.  This package
offers to programmers, translators and even users, a well integrated
set of tools and documentation.  Specifically, the GNU @code{gettext}
utilities are a set of tools that provides a framework within which
other free packages may produce multi-lingual messages.  These tools
include

@itemize @bullet
@item
A set of conventions about how programs should be written to support
message catalogs.

@item
A directory and file naming organization for the message catalogs
themselves.

@item
A runtime library supporting the retrieval of translated messages.

@item
A few stand-alone programs to massage in various ways the sets of
translatable strings, or already translated strings.

@item
A special mode for Emacs@footnote{In this manual, all mentions of Emacs
refers to either GNU Emacs or to XEmacs, which people sometimes call FSF
Emacs and Lucid Emacs, respectively.} which helps preparing these sets
and bringing them up to date.
@end itemize

GNU @code{gettext} is designed to minimize the impact of
internationalization on program sources, keeping this impact as small
and hardly noticeable as possible.  Internationalization has better
chances of succeeding if it is very light weighted, or at least,
appear to be so, when looking at program sources.

The Translation Project also uses the GNU @code{gettext} distribution
as a vehicle for documenting its structure and methods.  This goes
beyond the strict technicalities of documenting the GNU @code{gettext}
proper.  By so doing, translators will find in a single place, as
far as possible, all they need to know for properly doing their
translating work.  Also, this supplemental documentation might also
help programmers, and even curious users, in understanding how GNU
@code{gettext} is related to the remainder of the Translation
Project, and consequently, have a glimpse at the @emph{big picture}.

@node Concepts, Aspects, Why, Introduction
@section I18n, L10n, and Such

@cindex i18n
@cindex l10n
Two long words appear all the time when we discuss support of native
language in programs, and these words have a precise meaning, worth
being explained here, once and for all in this document.  The words are
@emph{internationalization} and @emph{localization}.  Many people,
tired of writing these long words over and over again, took the
habit of writing @dfn{i18n} and @dfn{l10n} instead, quoting the first
and last letter of each word, and replacing the run of intermediate
letters by a number merely telling how many such letters there are.
But in this manual, in the sake of clarity, we will patiently write
the names in full, each time@dots{}

@cindex internationalization
By @dfn{internationalization}, one refers to the operation by which a
program, or a set of programs turned into a package, is made aware of and
able to support multiple languages.  This is a generalization process,
by which the programs are untied from calling only English strings or
other English specific habits, and connected to generic ways of doing
the same, instead.  Program developers may use various techniques to
internationalize their programs.  Some of these have been standardized.
GNU @code{gettext} offers one of these standards.  @xref{Programmers}.

@cindex localization
By @dfn{localization}, one means the operation by which, in a set
of programs already internationalized, one gives the program all
needed information so that it can adapt itself to handle its input
and output in a fashion which is correct for some native language and
cultural habits.  This is a particularisation process, by which generic
methods already implemented in an internationalized program are used
in specific ways.  The programming environment puts several functions
to the programmers disposal which allow this runtime configuration.
The formal description of specific set of cultural habits for some
country, together with all associated translations targeted to the
same native language, is called the @dfn{locale} for this language
or country.  Users achieve localization of programs by setting proper
values to special environment variables, prior to executing those
programs, identifying which locale should be used.

In fact, locale message support is only one component of the cultural
data that makes up a particular locale.  There are a whole host of
routines and functions provided to aid programmers in developing
internationalized software and which allow them to access the data
stored in a particular locale.  When someone presently refers to a
particular locale, they are obviously referring to the data stored
within that particular locale.  Similarly, if a programmer is referring
to ``accessing the locale routines'', they are referring to the
complete suite of routines that access all of the locale's information.

@cindex NLS
@cindex Native Language Support
@cindex Natural Language Support
One uses the expression @dfn{Native Language Support}, or merely NLS,
for speaking of the overall activity or feature encompassing both
internationalization and localization, allowing for multi-lingual
interactions in a program.  In a nutshell, one could say that
internationalization is the operation by which further localizations
are made possible.

Also, very roughly said, when it comes to multi-lingual messages,
internationalization is usually taken care of by programmers, and
localization is usually taken care of by translators.

@node Aspects, Files, Concepts, Introduction
@section Aspects in Native Language Support

@cindex translation aspects
For a totally multi-lingual distribution, there are many things to
translate beyond output messages.

@itemize @bullet
@item
As of today, GNU @code{gettext} offers a complete toolset for
translating messages output by C programs.  Perl scripts and shell
scripts will also need to be translated.  Even if there are today some hooks
by which this can be done, these hooks are not integrated as well as they
should be.

@item
Some programs, like @code{autoconf} or @code{bison}, are able
to produce other programs (or scripts).  Even if the generating
programs themselves are internationalized, the generated programs they
produce may need internationalization on their own, and this indirect
internationalization could be automated right from the generating
program.  In fact, quite usually, generating and generated programs
could be internationalized independently, as the effort needed is
fairly orthogonal.

@item
A few programs include textual tables which might need translation
themselves, independently of the strings contained in the program
itself.  For example, @w{RFC 1345} gives an English description for each
character which the @code{recode} program is able to reconstruct at execution.
Since these descriptions are extracted from the RFC by mechanical means,
translating them properly would require a prior translation of the RFC
itself.

@item
Almost all programs accept options, which are often worded out so to
be descriptive for the English readers; one might want to consider
offering translated versions for program options as well.

@item
Many programs read, interpret, compile, or are somewhat driven by
input files which are texts containing keywords, identifiers, or
replies which are inherently translatable.  For example, one may want
@code{gcc} to allow diacriticized characters in identifiers or use
translated keywords; @samp{rm -i} might accept something else than
@samp{y} or @samp{n} for replies, etc.  Even if the program will
eventually make most of its output in the foreign languages, one has
to decide whether the input syntax, option values, etc., are to be
localized or not.

@item
The manual accompanying a package, as well as all documentation files
in the distribution, could surely be translated, too.  Translating a
manual, with the intent of later keeping up with updates, is a major
undertaking in itself, generally.

@end itemize

As we already stressed, translation is only one aspect of locales.
Other internationalization aspects are system services and are handled
in GNU @code{libc}.  There
are many attributes that are needed to define a country's cultural
conventions.  These attributes include beside the country's native
language, the formatting of the date and time, the representation of
numbers, the symbols for currency, etc.  These local @dfn{rules} are
termed the country's locale.  The locale represents the knowledge
needed to support the country's native attributes.

@cindex locale facets
There are a few major areas which may vary between countries and
hence, define what a locale must describe.  The following list helps
putting multi-lingual messages into the proper context of other tasks
related to locales.  See the GNU @code{libc} manual for details.

@table @emph

@item Characters and Codesets
@cindex codeset
@cindex encoding
@cindex character encoding
@cindex locale facet, LC_CTYPE

The codeset most commonly used through out the USA and most English
speaking parts of the world is the ASCII codeset.  However, there are
many characters needed by various locales that are not found within
this codeset.  The 8-bit @w{ISO 8859-1} code set has most of the special
characters needed to handle the major European languages.  However, in
many cases, the @w{ISO 8859-1} font is not adequate: it doesn't even
handle the major European currency.  Hence each locale
will need to specify which codeset they need to use and will need
to have the appropriate character handling routines to cope with
the codeset.

@item Currency
@cindex currency symbols
@cindex locale facet, LC_MONETARY

The symbols used vary from country to country as does the position
used by the symbol.  Software needs to be able to transparently
display currency figures in the native mode for each locale.

@item Dates
@cindex date format
@cindex locale facet, LC_TIME

The format of date varies between locales.  For example, Christmas day
in 1994 is written as 12/25/94 in the USA and as 25/12/94 in Australia.
Other countries might use @w{ISO 8061} dates, etc.

Time of the day may be noted as @var{hh}:@var{mm}, @var{hh}.@var{mm},
or otherwise.  Some locales require time to be specified in 24-hour
mode rather than as AM or PM.  Further, the nature and yearly extent
of the Daylight Saving correction vary widely between countries.

@item Numbers
@cindex number format
@cindex locale facet, LC_NUMERIC

Numbers can be represented differently in different locales.
For example, the following numbers are all written correctly for
their respective locales:

@example
12,345.67       English
12.345,67       German
 12345,67       French
1,2345.67       Asia
@end example

Some programs could go further and use different unit systems, like
English units or Metric units, or even take into account variants
about how numbers are spelled in full.

@item Messages
@cindex messages
@cindex locale facet, LC_MESSAGES

The most obvious area is the language support within a locale.  This is
where GNU @code{gettext} provides the means for developers and users to
easily change the language that the software uses to communicate to
the user.

@end table

@cindex Linux
Components of locale outside of message handling are standardized in
the ISO C standard and the SUSV2 specification.  GNU @code{libc}
fully implements this, and most other modern systems provide a more
or less reasonable support for at least some of the missing components.

@node Files, Overview, Aspects, Introduction
@section Files Conveying Translations

@cindex files, @file{.po} and @file{.mo}
The letters PO in @file{.po} files means Portable Object, to
distinguish it from @file{.mo} files, where MO stands for Machine
Object.  This paradigm, as well as the PO file format, is inspired
by the NLS standard developed by Uniforum, and first implemented by
Sun in their Solaris system.

PO files are meant to be read and edited by humans, and associate each
original, translatable string of a given package with its translation
in a particular target language.  A single PO file is dedicated to
a single target language.  If a package supports many languages,
there is one such PO file per language supported, and each package
has its own set of PO files.  These PO files are best created by
the @code{xgettext} program, and later updated or refreshed through
the @code{msgmerge} program.  Program @code{xgettext} extracts all
marked messages from a set of C files and initializes a PO file with
empty translations.  Program @code{msgmerge} takes care of adjusting
PO files between releases of the corresponding sources, commenting
obsolete entries, initializing new ones, and updating all source
line references.  Files ending with @file{.pot} are kind of base
translation files found in distributions, in PO file format.

MO files are meant to be read by programs, and are binary in nature.
A few systems already offer tools for creating and handling MO files
as part of the Native Language Support coming with the system, but the
format of these MO files is often different from system to system,
and non-portable.  The tools already provided with these systems don't
support all the features of GNU @code{gettext}.  Therefore GNU
@code{gettext} uses its own format for MO files.  Files ending with
@file{.gmo} are really MO files, when it is known that these files use
the GNU format.

@node Overview,  , Files, Introduction
@section Overview of GNU @code{gettext}

@cindex overview of @code{gettext}
@cindex big picture
@cindex tutorial of @code{gettext} usage
The following diagram summarizes the relation between the files
handled by GNU @code{gettext} and the tools acting on these files.
It is followed by somewhat detailed explanations, which you should
read while keeping an eye on the diagram.  Having a clear understanding
of these interrelations will surely help programmers, translators
and maintainers.

@example
@group
Original C Sources ---> PO mode ---> Marked C Sources ---.
                                                         |
              .---------<--- GNU gettext Library         |
.--- make <---+                                          |
|             `---------<--------------------+-----------'
|                                            |
|   .-----<--- PACKAGE.pot <--- xgettext <---'   .---<--- PO Compendium
|   |                                            |             ^
|   |                                            `---.         |
|   `---.                                            +---> PO mode ---.
|       +----> msgmerge ------> LANG.po ---->--------'                |
|   .---'                                                             |
|   |                                                                 |
|   `-------------<---------------.                                   |
|                                 +--- New LANG.po <------------------'
|   .--- LANG.gmo <--- msgfmt <---'
|   |
|   `---> install ---> /.../LANG/PACKAGE.mo ---.
|                                              +---> "Hello world!"
`-------> install ---> /.../bin/PROGRAM -------'
@end group
@end example

The indication @samp{PO mode} appears in two places in this picture,
and you may safely read it as merely meaning ``hand editing'', using
any editor of your choice, really.  However, for those of you being
the lucky users of Emacs, PO mode has been specifically created
for providing a cozy environment for editing or modifying PO files.
While editing a PO file, PO mode allows for the easy browsing of
auxiliary and compendium PO files, as well as for following references into
the set of C program sources from which PO files have been derived.
It has a few special features, among which are the interactive marking
of program strings as translatable, and the validatation of PO files
with easy repositioning to PO file lines showing errors.

@cindex marking translatable strings
As a programmer, the first step to bringing GNU @code{gettext}
into your package is identifying, right in the C sources, those strings
which are meant to be translatable, and those which are untranslatable.
This tedious job can be done a little more comfortably using emacs PO
mode, but you can use any means familiar to you for modifying your
C sources.  Beside this some other simple, standard changes are needed to
properly initialize the translation library.  @xref{Sources}, for
more information about all this.

For newly written software the strings of course can and should be
marked while writing it.  The @code{gettext} approach makes this
very easy.  Simply put the following lines at the beginning of each file
or in a central header file:

@example
@group
#define _(String) (String)
#define N_(String) String
#define textdomain(Domain)
#define bindtextdomain(Package, Directory)
@end group
@end example

@noindent
Doing this allows you to prepare the sources for internationalization.
Later when you feel ready for the step to use the @code{gettext} library
simply replace these definitions by the following:

@cindex include file @file{libintl.h}
@example
@group
#include <libintl.h>
#define _(String) gettext (String)
#define gettext_noop(String) String
#define N_(String) gettext_noop (String)
@end group
@end example

@cindex link with @file{libintl}
@cindex Linux
@noindent
and link against @file{libintl.a} or @file{libintl.so}.  Note that on
GNU systems, you don't need to link with @code{libintl} because the
@code{gettext} library functions are already contained in GNU libc.
That is all you have to change.

@cindex template PO file
@cindex files, @file{.pot}
Once the C sources have been modified, the @code{xgettext} program
is used to find and extract all translatable strings, and create a
PO template file out of all these.  This @file{@var{package}.pot} file
contains all original program strings.  It has sets of pointers to
exactly where in C sources each string is used.  All translations
are set to empty.  The letter @kbd{t} in @file{.pot} marks this as
a Template PO file, not yet oriented towards any particular language.
@xref{xgettext Invocation}, for more details about how one calls the
@code{xgettext} program.  If you are @emph{really} lazy, you might
be interested at working a lot more right away, and preparing the
whole distribution setup (@pxref{Maintainers}).  By doing so, you
spare yourself typing the @code{xgettext} command, as @code{make}
should now generate the proper things automatically for you!

The first time through, there is no @file{@var{lang}.po} yet, so the
@code{msgmerge} step may be skipped and replaced by a mere copy of
@file{@var{package}.pot} to @file{@var{lang}.po}, where @var{lang}
represents the target language.  See @ref{Creating} for details.

Then comes the initial translation of messages.  Translation in
itself is a whole matter, still exclusively meant for humans,
and whose complexity far overwhelms the level of this manual.
Nevertheless, a few hints are given in some other chapter of this
manual (@pxref{Translators}).  You will also find there indications
about how to contact translating teams, or becoming part of them,
for sharing your translating concerns with others who target the same
native language.

While adding the translated messages into the @file{@var{lang}.po}
PO file, if you do not have Emacs handy, you are on your own
for ensuring that your efforts fully respect the PO file format, and quoting
conventions (@pxref{PO Files}).  This is surely not an impossible task,
as this is the way many people have handled PO files already for Uniforum or
Solaris.  On the other hand, by using PO mode in Emacs, most details
of PO file format are taken care of for you, but you have to acquire
some familiarity with PO mode itself.  Besides main PO mode commands
(@pxref{Main PO Commands}), you should know how to move between entries
(@pxref{Entry Positioning}), and how to handle untranslated entries
(@pxref{Untranslated Entries}).

If some common translations have already been saved into a compendium
PO file, translators may use PO mode for initializing untranslated
entries from the compendium, and also save selected translations into
the compendium, updating it (@pxref{Compendium}).  Compendium files
are meant to be exchanged between members of a given translation team.

Programs, or packages of programs, are dynamic in nature: users write
bug reports and suggestion for improvements, maintainers react by
modifying programs in various ways.  The fact that a package has
already been internationalized should not make maintainers shy
of adding new strings, or modifying strings already translated.
They just do their job the best they can.  For the Translation
Project to work smoothly, it is important that maintainers do not
carry translation concerns on their already loaded shoulders, and that
translators be kept as free as possible of programming concerns.

The only concern maintainers should have is carefully marking new
strings as translatable, when they should be, and do not otherwise
worry about them being translated, as this will come in proper time.
Consequently, when programs and their strings are adjusted in various
ways by maintainers, and for matters usually unrelated to translation,
@code{xgettext} would construct @file{@var{package}.pot} files which are
evolving over time, so the translations carried by @file{@var{lang}.po}
are slowly fading out of date.

@cindex evolution of packages
It is important for translators (and even maintainers) to understand
that package translation is a continuous process in the lifetime of a
package, and not something which is done once and for all at the start.
After an initial burst of translation activity for a given package,
interventions are needed once in a while, because here and there,
translated entries become obsolete, and new untranslated entries
appear, needing translation.

The @code{msgmerge} program has the purpose of refreshing an already
existing @file{@var{lang}.po} file, by comparing it with a newer
@file{@var{package}.pot} template file, extracted by @code{xgettext}
out of recent C sources.  The refreshing operation adjusts all
references to C source locations for strings, since these strings
move as programs are modified.  Also, @code{msgmerge} comments out as
obsolete, in @file{@var{lang}.po}, those already translated entries
which are no longer used in the program sources (@pxref{Obsolete
Entries}).  It finally discovers new strings and inserts them in
the resulting PO file as untranslated entries (@pxref{Untranslated
Entries}).  @xref{msgmerge Invocation}, for more information about what
@code{msgmerge} really does.

Whatever route or means taken, the goal is to obtain an updated
@file{@var{lang}.po} file offering translations for all strings.

The temporal mobility, or fluidity of PO files, is an integral part of
the translation game, and should be well understood, and accepted.
People resisting it will have a hard time participating in the
Translation Project, or will give a hard time to other participants!  In
particular, maintainers should relax and include all available official
PO files in their distributions, even if these have not recently been
updated, without exerting pressure on the translator teams to get the
job done.  The pressure should rather come
from the community of users speaking a particular language, and
maintainers should consider themselves fairly relieved of any concern
about the adequacy of translation files.  On the other hand, translators
should reasonably try updating the PO files they are responsible for,
while the package is undergoing pretest, prior to an official
distribution.

Once the PO file is complete and dependable, the @code{msgfmt} program
is used for turning the PO file into a machine-oriented format, which
may yield efficient retrieval of translations by the programs of the
package, whenever needed at runtime (@pxref{MO Files}).  @xref{msgfmt
Invocation}, for more information about all modes of execution
for the @code{msgfmt} program.

Finally, the modified and marked C sources are compiled and linked
with the GNU @code{gettext} library, usually through the operation of
@code{make}, given a suitable @file{Makefile} exists for the project,
and the resulting executable is installed somewhere users will find it.
The MO files themselves should also be properly installed.  Given the
appropriate environment variables are set (@pxref{End Users}), the
program should localize itself automatically, whenever it executes.

The remainder of this manual has the purpose of explaining in depth the various
steps outlined above.

@node Basics, Sources, Introduction, Top
@chapter PO Files and PO Mode Basics

The GNU @code{gettext} toolset helps programmers and translators
at producing, updating and using translation files, mainly those
PO files which are textual, editable files.  This chapter stresses
the format of PO files, and contains a PO mode starter.  PO mode
description is spread throughout this manual instead of being concentrated
in one place.  Here we present only the basics of PO mode.

@menu
* Installation::                Completing GNU @code{gettext} Installation
* PO Files::                    The Format of PO Files
* Main PO Commands::            Main Commands
* Entry Positioning::           Entry Positioning
* Normalizing::                 Normalizing Strings in Entries
@end menu

@node Installation, PO Files, Basics, Basics
@section Completing GNU @code{gettext} Installation

@cindex installing @code{gettext}
@cindex @code{gettext} installation
Once you have received, unpacked, configured and compiled the GNU
@code{gettext} distribution, the @samp{make install} command puts in
place the programs @code{xgettext}, @code{msgfmt}, @code{gettext}, and
@code{msgmerge}, as well as their available message catalogs.  To
top off a comfortable installation, you might also want to make the
PO mode available to your Emacs users.

@emindex @file{.emacs} customizations
@emindex installing PO mode
During the installation of the PO mode, you might want to modify your
file @file{.emacs}, once and for all, so it contains a few lines looking
like:

@example
(setq auto-mode-alist
      (cons '("\\.po\\'\\|\\.po\\." . po-mode) auto-mode-alist))
(autoload 'po-mode "po-mode" "Major mode for translators to edit PO files" t)
@end example

Later, whenever you edit some @file{.po}
file, or any file having the string @samp{.po.} within its name,
Emacs loads @file{po-mode.elc} (or @file{po-mode.el}) as needed, and
automatically activates PO mode commands for the associated buffer.
The string @emph{PO} appears in the mode line for any buffer for
which PO mode is active.  Many PO files may be active at once in a
single Emacs session.

If you are using Emacs version 20 or newer, and have already installed
the appropriate international fonts on your system, you may also tell
Emacs how to determine automatically the coding system of every PO file.
This will often (but not always) cause the necessary fonts to be loaded
and used for displaying the translations on your Emacs screen.  For this
to happen, add the lines:

@example
(modify-coding-system-alist 'file "\\.po\\'\\|\\.po\\."
                            'po-find-file-coding-system)
(autoload 'po-find-file-coding-system "po-mode")
@end example

@noindent
to your @file{.emacs} file.  If, with this, you still see boxes instead
of international characters, try a different font set (via Shift Mouse
button 1).

@node PO Files, Main PO Commands, Installation, Basics
@section The Format of PO Files
@cindex PO files' format
@cindex file format, @file{.po}

A PO file is made up of many entries, each entry holding the relation
between an original untranslated string and its corresponding
translation.  All entries in a given PO file usually pertain
to a single project, and all translations are expressed in a single
target language.  One PO file @dfn{entry} has the following schematic
structure:

@example
@var{white-space}
#  @var{translator-comments}
#. @var{automatic-comments}
#: @var{reference}@dots{}
#, @var{flag}@dots{}
msgid @var{untranslated-string}
msgstr @var{translated-string}
@end example

The general structure of a PO file should be well understood by
the translator.  When using PO mode, very little has to be known
about the format details, as PO mode takes care of them for her.

Entries begin with some optional white space.  Usually, when generated
through GNU @code{gettext} tools, there is exactly one blank line
between entries.  Then comments follow, on lines all starting with the
character @kbd{#}.  There are two kinds of comments: those which have
some white space immediately following the @kbd{#}, which comments are
created and maintained exclusively by the translator, and those which
have some non-white character just after the @kbd{#}, which comments
are created and maintained automatically by GNU @code{gettext} tools.
All comments, of either kind, are optional.

@kwindex msgid
@kwindex msgstr
After white space and comments, entries show two strings, namely
first the untranslated string as it appears in the original program
sources, and then, the translation of this string.  The original
string is introduced by the keyword @code{msgid}, and the translation,
by @code{msgstr}.  The two strings, untranslated and translated,
are quoted in various ways in the PO file, using @kbd{"}
delimiters and @kbd{\} escapes, but the translator does not really
have to pay attention to the precise quoting format, as PO mode fully
takes care of quoting for her.

The @code{msgid} strings, as well as automatic comments, are produced
and managed by other GNU @code{gettext} tools, and PO mode does not
provide means for the translator to alter these.  The most she can
do is merely deleting them, and only by deleting the whole entry.
On the other hand, the @code{msgstr} string, as well as translator
comments, are really meant for the translator, and PO mode gives her
the full control she needs.

The comment lines beginning with @kbd{#,} are special because they are
not completely ignored by the programs as comments generally are.  The
comma separated list of @var{flag}s is used by the @code{msgfmt}
program to give the user some better diagnostic messages.  Currently
there are two forms of flags defined:

@table @kbd
@item fuzzy
@kwindex fuzzy@r{ flag}
This flag can be generated by the @code{msgmerge} program or it can be
inserted by the translator herself.  It shows that the @code{msgstr}
string might not be a correct translation (anymore).  Only the translator
can judge if the translation requires further modification, or is
acceptable as is.  Once satisfied with the translation, she then removes
this @kbd{fuzzy} attribute.  The @code{msgmerge} program inserts this
when it combined the @code{msgid} and @code{msgstr} entries after fuzzy
search only.  @xref{Fuzzy Entries}.

@item c-format
@kwindex c-format@r{ flag}
@itemx no-c-format
@kwindex no-c-format@r{ flag}
These flags should not be added by a human.  Instead only the
@code{xgettext} program adds them.  In an automated PO file processing
system as proposed here the user changes would be thrown away again as
soon as the @code{xgettext} program generates a new template file.

In case the @kbd{c-format} flag is given for a string the @code{msgfmt}
does some more tests to check to validity of the translation.
@xref{msgfmt Invocation}.

@end table

@kwindex msgid_plural
A different kind of entries is used for translations which involve
plural forms.

@example
@var{white-space}
#  @var{translator-comments}
#. @var{automatic-comments}
#: @var{reference}@dots{}
#, @var{flag}@dots{}
msgid @var{untranslated-string-singular}
msgid_plural @var{untranslated-string-plural}
msgstr[0] @var{translated-string-case-0}
...
msgstr[N] @var{translated-string-case-n}
@end example

@efindex po-normalize@r{, PO Mode command}
It happens that some lines, usually whitespace or comments, follow the
very last entry of a PO file.  Such lines are not part of any entry,
and PO mode is unable to take action on those lines.  By using the
PO mode function @w{@kbd{M-x po-normalize}}, the translator may get
rid of those spurious lines.  @xref{Normalizing}.

The remainder of this section may be safely skipped by those using
PO mode, yet it may be interesting for everybody to have a better
idea of the precise format of a PO file.  On the other hand, those
not having Emacs handy should carefully continue reading on.

Each of @var{untranslated-string} and @var{translated-string} respects
the C syntax for a character string, including the surrounding quotes
and embedded backslashed escape sequences.  When the time comes
to write multi-line strings, one should not use escaped newlines.
Instead, a closing quote should follow the last character on the
line to be continued, and an opening quote should resume the string
at the beginning of the following PO file line.  For example:

@example
msgid ""
"Here is an example of how one might continue a very long string\n"
"for the common case the string represents multi-line output.\n"
@end example

@noindent
In this example, the empty string is used on the first line, to
allow better alignment of the @kbd{H} from the word @samp{Here}
over the @kbd{f} from the word @samp{for}.  In this example, the
@code{msgid} keyword is followed by three strings, which are meant
to be concatenated.  Concatenating the empty string does not change
the resulting overall string, but it is a way for us to comply with
the necessity of @code{msgid} to be followed by a string on the same
line, while keeping the multi-line presentation left-justified, as
we find this to be a cleaner disposition.  The empty string could have
been omitted, but only if the string starting with @samp{Here} was
promoted on the first line, right after @code{msgid}.@footnote{This
limitation is not imposed by GNU @code{gettext}, but is for compatibility
with the @code{msgfmt} implementation on Solaris.} It was not really necessary
either to switch between the two last quoted strings immediately after
the newline @samp{\n}, the switch could have occurred after @emph{any}
other character, we just did it this way because it is neater.

@cindex newlines in PO files
One should carefully distinguish between end of lines marked as
@samp{\n} @emph{inside} quotes, which are part of the represented
string, and end of lines in the PO file itself, outside string quotes,
which have no incidence on the represented string.

@cindex comments in PO files
Outside strings, white lines and comments may be used freely.
Comments start at the beginning of a line with @samp{#} and extend
until the end of the PO file line.  Comments written by translators
should have the initial @samp{#} immediately followed by some white
space.  If the @samp{#} is not immediately followed by white space,
this comment is most likely generated and managed by specialized GNU
tools, and might disappear or be replaced unexpectedly when the PO
file is given to @code{msgmerge}.

@node Main PO Commands, Entry Positioning, PO Files, Basics
@section Main PO mode Commands

@cindex PO mode (Emacs) commands
@emindex commands
After setting up Emacs with something similar to the lines in
@ref{Installation}, PO mode is activated for a window when Emacs finds a
PO file in that window.  This puts the window read-only and establishes a
po-mode-map, which is a genuine Emacs mode, in a way that is not derived
from text mode in any way.  Functions found on @code{po-mode-hook},
if any, will be executed.

When PO mode is active in a window, the letters @samp{PO} appear
in the mode line for that window.  The mode line also displays how
many entries of each kind are held in the PO file.  For example,
the string @samp{132t+3f+10u+2o} would tell the translator that the
PO mode contains 132 translated entries (@pxref{Translated Entries},
3 fuzzy entries (@pxref{Fuzzy Entries}), 10 untranslated entries
(@pxref{Untranslated Entries}) and 2 obsolete entries (@pxref{Obsolete
Entries}).  Zero-coefficients items are not shown.  So, in this example, if
the fuzzy entries were unfuzzied, the untranslated entries were translated
and the obsolete entries were deleted, the mode line would merely display
@samp{145t} for the counters.

The main PO commands are those which do not fit into the other categories of
subsequent sections.  These allow for quitting PO mode or for managing windows
in special ways.

@table @kbd
@item _
@efindex _@r{, PO Mode command}
Undo last modification to the PO file (@code{po-undo}).

@item Q
@efindex Q@r{, PO Mode command}
Quit processing and save the PO file (@code{po-quit}).

@item q
@efindex q@r{, PO Mode command}
Quit processing, possibly after confirmation (@code{po-confirm-and-quit}).

@item 0
@efindex 0@r{, PO Mode command}
Temporary leave the PO file window (@code{po-other-window}).

@item ?
@itemx h
@efindex ?@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex h@r{, PO Mode command}
Show help about PO mode (@code{po-help}).

@item =
@efindex =@r{, PO Mode command}
Give some PO file statistics (@code{po-statistics}).

@item V
@efindex V@r{, PO Mode command}
Batch validate the format of the whole PO file (@code{po-validate}).

@end table

@efindex _@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-undo@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{_} (@code{po-undo}) interfaces to the Emacs
@emph{undo} facility.  @xref{Undo, , Undoing Changes, emacs, The Emacs
Editor}.  Each time @kbd{U} is typed, modifications which the translator
did to the PO file are undone a little more.  For the purpose of
undoing, each PO mode command is atomic.  This is especially true for
the @kbd{@key{RET}} command: the whole edition made by using a single
use of this command is undone at once, even if the edition itself
implied several actions.  However, while in the editing window, one
can undo the edition work quite parsimoniously.

@efindex Q@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex q@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-quit@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-confirm-and-quit@r{, PO Mode command}
The commands @kbd{Q} (@code{po-quit}) and @kbd{q}
(@code{po-confirm-and-quit}) are used when the translator is done with the
PO file.  The former is a bit less verbose than the latter.  If the file
has been modified, it is saved to disk first.  In both cases, and prior to
all this, the commands check if any untranslated messages remain in the
PO file and, if so, the translator is asked if she really wants to leave
off working with this PO file.  This is the preferred way of getting rid
of an Emacs PO file buffer.  Merely killing it through the usual command
@w{@kbd{C-x k}} (@code{kill-buffer}) is not the tidiest way to proceed.

@efindex 0@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-other-window@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{0} (@code{po-other-window}) is another, softer way,
to leave PO mode, temporarily.  It just moves the cursor to some other
Emacs window, and pops one if necessary.  For example, if the translator
just got PO mode to show some source context in some other, she might
discover some apparent bug in the program source that needs correction.
This command allows the translator to change sex, become a programmer,
and have the cursor right into the window containing the program she
(or rather @emph{he}) wants to modify.  By later getting the cursor back
in the PO file window, or by asking Emacs to edit this file once again,
PO mode is then recovered.

@efindex ?@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex h@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-help@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{h} (@code{po-help}) displays a summary of all available PO
mode commands.  The translator should then type any character to resume
normal PO mode operations.  The command @kbd{?} has the same effect
as @kbd{h}.

@efindex =@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-statistics@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{=} (@code{po-statistics}) computes the total number of
entries in the PO file, the ordinal of the current entry (counted from
1), the number of untranslated entries, the number of obsolete entries,
and displays all these numbers.

@efindex V@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-validate@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{V} (@code{po-validate}) launches @code{msgfmt} in
checking and verbose
mode over the current PO file.  This command first offers to save the
current PO file on disk.  The @code{msgfmt} tool, from GNU @code{gettext},
has the purpose of creating a MO file out of a PO file, and PO mode uses
the features of this program for checking the overall format of a PO file,
as well as all individual entries.

@efindex next-error@r{, stepping through PO file validation results}
The program @code{msgfmt} runs asynchronously with Emacs, so the
translator regains control immediately while her PO file is being studied.
Error output is collected in the Emacs @samp{*compilation*} buffer,
displayed in another window.  The regular Emacs command @kbd{C-x`}
(@code{next-error}), as well as other usual compile commands, allow the
translator to reposition quickly to the offending parts of the PO file.
Once the cursor is on the line in error, the translator may decide on
any PO mode action which would help correcting the error.

@node Entry Positioning, Normalizing, Main PO Commands, Basics
@section Entry Positioning

@emindex current entry of a PO file
The cursor in a PO file window is almost always part of
an entry.  The only exceptions are the special case when the cursor
is after the last entry in the file, or when the PO file is
empty.  The entry where the cursor is found to be is said to be the
current entry.  Many PO mode commands operate on the current entry,
so moving the cursor does more than allowing the translator to browse
the PO file, this also selects on which entry commands operate.

@emindex moving through a PO file
Some PO mode commands alter the position of the cursor in a specialized
way.  A few of those special purpose positioning are described here,
the others are described in following sections (for a complete list try
@kbd{C-h m}):

@table @kbd

@item .
@efindex .@r{, PO Mode command}
Redisplay the current entry (@code{po-current-entry}).

@item n
@efindex n@r{, PO Mode command}
Select the entry after the current one (@code{po-next-entry}).

@item p
@efindex p@r{, PO Mode command}
Select the entry before the current one (@code{po-previous-entry}).

@item <
@efindex <@r{, PO Mode command}
Select the first entry in the PO file (@code{po-first-entry}).

@item >
@efindex >@r{, PO Mode command}
Select the last entry in the PO file (@code{po-last-entry}).

@item m
@efindex m@r{, PO Mode command}
Record the location of the current entry for later use
(@code{po-push-location}).

@item r
@efindex r@r{, PO Mode command}
Return to a previously saved entry location (@code{po-pop-location}).

@item x
@efindex x@r{, PO Mode command}
Exchange the current entry location with the previously saved one
(@code{po-exchange-location}).

@end table

@efindex .@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-current-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
Any Emacs command able to reposition the cursor may be used
to select the current entry in PO mode, including commands which
move by characters, lines, paragraphs, screens or pages, and search
commands.  However, there is a kind of standard way to display the
current entry in PO mode, which usual Emacs commands moving
the cursor do not especially try to enforce.  The command @kbd{.}
(@code{po-current-entry}) has the sole purpose of redisplaying the
current entry properly, after the current entry has been changed by
means external to PO mode, or the Emacs screen otherwise altered.

It is yet to be decided if PO mode helps the translator, or otherwise
irritates her, by forcing a rigid window disposition while she
is doing her work.  We originally had quite precise ideas about
how windows should behave, but on the other hand, anyone used to
Emacs is often happy to keep full control.  Maybe a fixed window
disposition might be offered as a PO mode option that the translator
might activate or deactivate at will, so it could be offered on an
experimental basis.  If nobody feels a real need for using it, or
a compulsion for writing it, we should drop this whole idea.
The incentive for doing it should come from translators rather than
programmers, as opinions from an experienced translator are surely
more worth to me than opinions from programmers @emph{thinking} about
how @emph{others} should do translation.

@efindex n@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-next-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex p@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-previous-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
The commands @kbd{n} (@code{po-next-entry}) and @kbd{p}
(@code{po-previous-entry}) move the cursor the entry following,
or preceding, the current one.  If @kbd{n} is given while the
cursor is on the last entry of the PO file, or if @kbd{p}
is given while the cursor is on the first entry, no move is done.

@efindex <@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-first-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex >@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-last-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
The commands @kbd{<} (@code{po-first-entry}) and @kbd{>}
(@code{po-last-entry}) move the cursor to the first entry, or last
entry, of the PO file.  When the cursor is located past the last
entry in a PO file, most PO mode commands will return an error saying
@samp{After last entry}.  Moreover, the commands @kbd{<} and @kbd{>}
have the special property of being able to work even when the cursor
is not into some PO file entry, and one may use them for nicely
correcting this situation.  But even these commands will fail on a
truly empty PO file.  There are development plans for the PO mode for it
to interactively fill an empty PO file from sources.  @xref{Marking}.

The translator may decide, before working at the translation of
a particular entry, that she needs to browse the remainder of the
PO file, maybe for finding the terminology or phraseology used
in related entries.  She can of course use the standard Emacs idioms
for saving the current cursor location in some register, and use that
register for getting back, or else, use the location ring.

@efindex m@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-push-location@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex r@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-pop-location@r{, PO Mode command}
PO mode offers another approach, by which cursor locations may be saved
onto a special stack.  The command @kbd{m} (@code{po-push-location})
merely adds the location of current entry to the stack, pushing
the already saved locations under the new one.  The command
@kbd{r} (@code{po-pop-location}) consumes the top stack element and
repositions the cursor to the entry associated with that top element.
This position is then lost, for the next @kbd{r} will move the cursor
to the previously saved location, and so on until no locations remain
on the stack.

If the translator wants the position to be kept on the location stack,
maybe for taking a look at the entry associated with the top
element, then go elsewhere with the intent of getting back later, she
ought to use @kbd{m} immediately after @kbd{r}.

@efindex x@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-exchange-location@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{x} (@code{po-exchange-location}) simultaneously
repositions the cursor to the entry associated with the top element of
the stack of saved locations, and replaces that top element with the
location of the current entry before the move.  Consequently, repeating
the @kbd{x} command toggles alternatively between two entries.
For achieving this, the translator will position the cursor on the
first entry, use @kbd{m}, then position to the second entry, and
merely use @kbd{x} for making the switch.

@node Normalizing,  , Entry Positioning, Basics
@section Normalizing Strings in Entries
@cindex string normalization in entries

There are many different ways for encoding a particular string into a
PO file entry, because there are so many different ways to split and
quote multi-line strings, and even, to represent special characters
by backslashed escaped sequences.  Some features of PO mode rely on
the ability for PO mode to scan an already existing PO file for a
particular string encoded into the @code{msgid} field of some entry.
Even if PO mode has internally all the built-in machinery for
implementing this recognition easily, doing it fast is technically
difficult.  To facilitate a solution to this efficiency problem,
we decided on a canonical representation for strings.

A conventional representation of strings in a PO file is currently
under discussion, and PO mode experiments with a canonical representation.
Having both @code{xgettext} and PO mode converging towards a uniform
way of representing equivalent strings would be useful, as the internal
normalization needed by PO mode could be automatically satisfied
when using @code{xgettext} from GNU @code{gettext}.  An explicit
PO mode normalization should then be only necessary for PO files
imported from elsewhere, or for when the convention itself evolves.

So, for achieving normalization of at least the strings of a given
PO file needing a canonical representation, the following PO mode
command is available:

@emindex string normalization in entries
@table @kbd
@item M-x po-normalize
@efindex po-normalize@r{, PO Mode command}
Tidy the whole PO file by making entries more uniform.

@end table

The special command @kbd{M-x po-normalize}, which has no associated
keys, revises all entries, ensuring that strings of both original
and translated entries use uniform internal quoting in the PO file.
It also removes any crumb after the last entry.  This command may be
useful for PO files freshly imported from elsewhere, or if we ever
improve on the canonical quoting format we use.  This canonical format
is not only meant for getting cleaner PO files, but also for greatly
speeding up @code{msgid} string lookup for some other PO mode commands.

@kbd{M-x po-normalize} presently makes three passes over the entries.
The first implements heuristics for converting PO files for GNU
@code{gettext} 0.6 and earlier, in which @code{msgid} and @code{msgstr}
fields were using K&R style C string syntax for multi-line strings.
These heuristics may fail for comments not related to obsolete
entries and ending with a backslash; they also depend on subsequent
passes for finalizing the proper commenting of continued lines for
obsolete entries.  This first pass might disappear once all oldish PO
files would have been adjusted.  The second and third pass normalize
all @code{msgid} and @code{msgstr} strings respectively.  They also
clean out those trailing backslashes used by XView's @code{msgfmt}
for continued lines.

@cindex importing PO files
Having such an explicit normalizing command allows for importing PO
files from other sources, but also eases the evolution of the current
convention, evolution driven mostly by aesthetic concerns, as of now.
It is easy to make suggested adjustments at a later time, as the
normalizing command and eventually, other GNU @code{gettext} tools
should greatly automate conformance.  A description of the canonical
string format is given below, for the particular benefit of those not
having Emacs handy, and who would nevertheless want to handcraft
their PO files in nice ways.

@cindex multi-line strings
Right now, in PO mode, strings are single line or multi-line.  A string
goes multi-line if and only if it has @emph{embedded} newlines, that
is, if it matches @samp{[^\n]\n+[^\n]}.  So, we would have:

@example
msgstr "\n\nHello, world!\n\n\n"
@end example

but, replacing the space by a newline, this becomes:

@example
msgstr ""
"\n"
"\n"
"Hello,\n"
"world!\n"
"\n"
"\n"
@end example

We are deliberately using a caricatural example, here, to make the
point clearer.  Usually, multi-lines are not that bad looking.
It is probable that we will implement the following suggestion.
We might lump together all initial newlines into the empty string,
and also all newlines introducing empty lines (that is, for @w{@var{n}
> 1}, the @var{n}-1'th last newlines would go together on a separate
string), so making the previous example appear:

@example
msgstr "\n\n"
"Hello,\n"
"world!\n"
"\n\n"
@end example

There are a few yet undecided little points about string normalization,
to be documented in this manual, once these questions settle.

@node Sources, Template, Basics, Top
@chapter Preparing Program Sources
@cindex preparing programs for translation

@c FIXME: Rewrite (the whole chapter).

For the programmer, changes to the C source code fall into three
categories.  First, you have to make the localization functions
known to all modules needing message translation.  Second, you should
properly trigger the operation of GNU @code{gettext} when the program
initializes, usually from the @code{main} function.  Last, you should
identify and especially mark all constant strings in your program
needing translation.

Presuming that your set of programs, or package, has been adjusted
so all needed GNU @code{gettext} files are available, and your
@file{Makefile} files are adjusted (@pxref{Maintainers}), each C module
having translated C strings should contain the line:

@cindex include file @file{libintl.h}
@example
#include <libintl.h>
@end example

The remaining changes to your C sources are discussed in the further
sections of this chapter.

@menu
* Triggering::                  Triggering @code{gettext} Operations
* Mark Keywords::               How Marks Appear in Sources
* Marking::                     Marking Translatable Strings
* c-format::                    Telling something about the following string
* Special cases::               Special Cases of Translatable Strings
@end menu

@node Triggering, Mark Keywords, Sources, Sources
@section Triggering @code{gettext} Operations

@cindex initialization
The initialization of locale data should be done with more or less
the same code in every program, as demonstrated below:

@example
@group
int
main (argc, argv)
     int argc;
     char argv;
@{
  @dots{}
  setlocale (LC_ALL, "");
  bindtextdomain (PACKAGE, LOCALEDIR);
  textdomain (PACKAGE);
  @dots{}
@}
@end group
@end example

@var{PACKAGE} and @var{LOCALEDIR} should be provided either by
@file{config.h} or by the Makefile.  For now consult the @code{gettext}
or @code{hello} sources for more information.

@cindex locale facet, LC_ALL
@cindex locale facet, LC_CTYPE
The use of @code{LC_ALL} might not be appropriate for you.
@code{LC_ALL} includes all locale categories and especially
@code{LC_CTYPE}.  This later category is responsible for determining
character classes with the @code{isalnum} etc. functions from
@file{ctype.h} which could especially for programs, which process some
kind of input language, be wrong.  For example this would mean that a
source code using the @,{c} (c-cedilla character) is runnable in
France but not in the U.S.

Some systems also have problems with parsing numbers using the
@code{scanf} functions if an other but the @code{LC_ALL} locale is used.
The standards say that additional formats but the one known in the
@code{"C"} locale might be recognized.  But some systems seem to reject
numbers in the @code{"C"} locale format.  In some situation, it might
also be a problem with the notation itself which makes it impossible to
recognize whether the number is in the @code{"C"} locale or the local
format.  This can happen if thousands separator characters are used.
Some locales define this character accordfing to the national
conventions to @code{'.'} which is the same character used in the
@code{"C"} locale to denote the decimal point.

So it is sometimes necessary to replace the @code{LC_ALL} line in the
code above by a sequence of @code{setlocale} lines

@example
@group
@{
  @dots{}
  setlocale (LC_CTYPE, "");
  setlocale (LC_MESSAGES, "");
  @dots{}
@}
@end group
@end example

@cindex locale facet, LC_CTYPE
@cindex locale facet, LC_COLLATE
@cindex locale facet, LC_MONETARY
@cindex locale facet, LC_NUMERIC
@cindex locale facet, LC_TIME
@cindex locale facet, LC_MESSAGES
@cindex locale facet, LC_RESPONSES
@noindent
On all POSIX conformant systems the locale categories @code{LC_CTYPE},
@code{LC_COLLATE}, @code{LC_MONETARY}, @code{LC_NUMERIC}, and
@code{LC_TIME} are available.  On some modern systems there is also a
locale @code{LC_MESSAGES} which is called on some old, XPG2 compliant
systems @code{LC_RESPONSES}.

Note that changing the @code{LC_CTYPE} also affects the functions
declared in the @code{<ctype.h>} standard header.  If this is not
desirable in your application (for example in a compiler's parser),
you can use a set of substitute functions which hardwire the C locale,
such as found in the @code{<c-ctype.h>} and @code{<c-ctype.c>} files
in the gettext source distribution.

It is also possible to switch the locale forth and back between the
environment dependent locale and the C locale, but this approach is
normally avoided because a @code{setlocale} call is expensive,
because it is tedious to determine the places where a locale switch
is needed in a large program's source, and because switching a locale
is not multithread-safe.

@node Mark Keywords, Marking, Triggering, Sources
@section How Marks Appear in Sources
@cindex marking strings that require translation

All strings requiring translation should be marked in the C sources.  Marking
is done in such a way that each translatable string appears to be
the sole argument of some function or preprocessor macro.  There are
only a few such possible functions or macros meant for translation,
and their names are said to be marking keywords.  The marking is
attached to strings themselves, rather than to what we do with them.
This approach has more uses.  A blatant example is an error message
produced by formatting.  The format string needs translation, as
well as some strings inserted through some @samp{%s} specification
in the format, while the result from @code{sprintf} may have so many
different instances that it is impractical to list them all in some
@samp{error_string_out()} routine, say.

This marking operation has two goals.  The first goal of marking
is for triggering the retrieval of the translation, at run time.
The keyword are possibly resolved into a routine able to dynamically
return the proper translation, as far as possible or wanted, for the
argument string.  Most localizable strings are found in executable
positions, that is, attached to variables or given as parameters to
functions.  But this is not universal usage, and some translatable
strings appear in structured initializations.  @xref{Special cases}.

The second goal of the marking operation is to help @code{xgettext}
at properly extracting all translatable strings when it scans a set
of program sources and produces PO file templates.

The canonical keyword for marking translatable strings is
@samp{gettext}, it gave its name to the whole GNU @code{gettext}
package.  For packages making only light use of the @samp{gettext}
keyword, macro or function, it is easily used @emph{as is}.  However,
for packages using the @code{gettext} interface more heavily, it
is usually more convenient to give the main keyword a shorter, less
obtrusive name.  Indeed, the keyword might appear on a lot of strings
all over the package, and programmers usually do not want nor need
their program sources to remind them forcefully, all the time, that they
are internationalized.  Further, a long keyword has the disadvantage
of using more horizontal space, forcing more indentation work on
sources for those trying to keep them within 79 or 80 columns.

@cindex @code{_}, a macro to mark strings for translation
Many packages use @samp{_} (a simple underline) as a keyword,
and write @samp{_("Translatable string")} instead of @samp{gettext
("Translatable string")}.  Further, the coding rule, from GNU standards,
wanting that there is a space between the keyword and the opening
parenthesis is relaxed, in practice, for this particular usage.
So, the textual overhead per translatable string is reduced to
only three characters: the underline and the two parentheses.
However, even if GNU @code{gettext} uses this convention internally,
it does not offer it officially.  The real, genuine keyword is truly
@samp{gettext} indeed.  It is fairly easy for those wanting to use
@samp{_} instead of @samp{gettext} to declare:

@example
#include <libintl.h>
#define _(String) gettext (String)
@end example

@noindent
instead of merely using @samp{#include <libintl.h>}.

Later on, the maintenance is relatively easy.  If, as a programmer,
you add or modify a string, you will have to ask yourself if the
new or altered string requires translation, and include it within
@samp{_()} if you think it should be translated.  @samp{"%s: %d"} is
an example of string @emph{not} requiring translation!

@node Marking, c-format, Mark Keywords, Sources
@section Marking Translatable Strings
@emindex marking strings for translation

In PO mode, one set of features is meant more for the programmer than
for the translator, and allows him to interactively mark which strings,
in a set of program sources, are translatable, and which are not.
Even if it is a fairly easy job for a programmer to find and mark
such strings by other means, using any editor of his choice, PO mode
makes this work more comfortable.  Further, this gives translators
who feel a little like programmers, or programmers who feel a little
like translators, a tool letting them work at marking translatable
strings in the program sources, while simultaneously producing a set of
translation in some language, for the package being internationalized.

@emindex @code{etags}, using for marking strings
The set of program sources, targetted by the PO mode commands describe
here, should have an Emacs tags table constructed for your project,
prior to using these PO file commands.  This is easy to do.  In any
shell window, change the directory to the root of your project, then
execute a command resembling:

@example
etags src/*.[hc] lib/*.[hc]
@end example

@noindent
presuming here you want to process all @file{.h} and @file{.c} files
from the @file{src/} and @file{lib/} directories.  This command will
explore all said files and create a @file{TAGS} file in your root
directory, somewhat summarizing the contents using a special file
format Emacs can understand.

@emindex @file{TAGS}, and marking translatable strings
For packages following the GNU coding standards, there is
a make goal @code{tags} or @code{TAGS} which constructs the tag files in
all directories and for all files containing source code.

Once your @file{TAGS} file is ready, the following commands assist
the programmer at marking translatable strings in his set of sources.
But these commands are necessarily driven from within a PO file
window, and it is likely that you do not even have such a PO file yet.
This is not a problem at all, as you may safely open a new, empty PO
file, mainly for using these commands.  This empty PO file will slowly
fill in while you mark strings as translatable in your program sources.

@table @kbd
@item ,
@efindex ,@r{, PO Mode command}
Search through program sources for a string which looks like a
candidate for translation (@code{po-tags-search}).

@item M-,
@efindex M-,@r{, PO Mode command}
Mark the last string found with @samp{_()} (@code{po-mark-translatable}).

@item M-.
@efindex M-.@r{, PO Mode command}
Mark the last string found with a keyword taken from a set of possible
keywords.  This command with a prefix allows some management of these
keywords (@code{po-select-mark-and-mark}).

@end table

@efindex po-tags-search@r{, PO Mode command}
The @kbd{,} (@code{po-tags-search}) command searches for the next
occurrence of a string which looks like a possible candidate for
translation, and displays the program source in another Emacs window,
positioned in such a way that the string is near the top of this other
window.  If the string is too big to fit whole in this window, it is
positioned so only its end is shown.  In any case, the cursor
is left in the PO file window.  If the shown string would be better
presented differently in different native languages, you may mark it
using @kbd{M-,} or @kbd{M-.}.  Otherwise, you might rather ignore it
and skip to the next string by merely repeating the @kbd{,} command.

A string is a good candidate for translation if it contains a sequence
of three or more letters.  A string containing at most two letters in
a row will be considered as a candidate if it has more letters than
non-letters.  The command disregards strings containing no letters,
or isolated letters only.  It also disregards strings within comments,
or strings already marked with some keyword PO mode knows (see below).

If you have never told Emacs about some @file{TAGS} file to use, the
command will request that you specify one from the minibuffer, the
first time you use the command.  You may later change your @file{TAGS}
file by using the regular Emacs command @w{@kbd{M-x visit-tags-table}},
which will ask you to name the precise @file{TAGS} file you want
to use.  @xref{Tags, , Tag Tables, emacs, The Emacs Editor}.

Each time you use the @kbd{,} command, the search resumes from where it was
left by the previous search, and goes through all program sources,
obeying the @file{TAGS} file, until all sources have been processed.
However, by giving a prefix argument to the command @w{(@kbd{C-u
,})}, you may request that the search be restarted all over again
from the first program source; but in this case, strings that you
recently marked as translatable will be automatically skipped.

Using this @kbd{,} command does not prevent using of other regular
Emacs tags commands.  For example, regular @code{tags-search} or
@code{tags-query-replace} commands may be used without disrupting the
independent @kbd{,} search sequence.  However, as implemented, the
@emph{initial} @kbd{,} command (or the @kbd{,} command is used with a
prefix) might also reinitialize the regular Emacs tags searching to the
first tags file, this reinitialization might be considered spurious.

@efindex po-mark-translatable@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-select-mark-and-mark@r{, PO Mode command}
The @kbd{M-,} (@code{po-mark-translatable}) command will mark the
recently found string with the @samp{_} keyword.  The @kbd{M-.}
(@code{po-select-mark-and-mark}) command will request that you type
one keyword from the minibuffer and use that keyword for marking
the string.  Both commands will automatically create a new PO file
untranslated entry for the string being marked, and make it the
current entry (making it easy for you to immediately proceed to its
translation, if you feel like doing it right away).  It is possible
that the modifications made to the program source by @kbd{M-,} or
@kbd{M-.} render some source line longer than 80 columns, forcing you
to break and re-indent this line differently.  You may use the @kbd{O}
command from PO mode, or any other window changing command from
Emacs, to break out into the program source window, and do any
needed adjustments.  You will have to use some regular Emacs command
to return the cursor to the PO file window, if you want command
@kbd{,} for the next string, say.

The @kbd{M-.} command has a few built-in speedups, so you do not
have to explicitly type all keywords all the time.  The first such
speedup is that you are presented with a @emph{preferred} keyword,
which you may accept by merely typing @kbd{@key{RET}} at the prompt.
The second speedup is that you may type any non-ambiguous prefix of the
keyword you really mean, and the command will complete it automatically
for you.  This also means that PO mode has to @emph{know} all
your possible keywords, and that it will not accept mistyped keywords.

If you reply @kbd{?} to the keyword request, the command gives a
list of all known keywords, from which you may choose.  When the
command is prefixed by an argument @w{(@kbd{C-u M-.})}, it inhibits
updating any program source or PO file buffer, and does some simple
keyword management instead.  In this case, the command asks for a
keyword, written in full, which becomes a new allowed keyword for
later @kbd{M-.} commands.  Moreover, this new keyword automatically
becomes the @emph{preferred} keyword for later commands.  By typing
an already known keyword in response to @w{@kbd{C-u M-.}}, one merely
changes the @emph{preferred} keyword and does nothing more.

All keywords known for @kbd{M-.} are recognized by the @kbd{,} command
when scanning for strings, and strings already marked by any of those
known keywords are automatically skipped.  If many PO files are opened
simultaneously, each one has its own independent set of known keywords.
There is no provision in PO mode, currently, for deleting a known
keyword, you have to quit the file (maybe using @kbd{q}) and reopen
it afresh.  When a PO file is newly brought up in an Emacs window, only
@samp{gettext} and @samp{_} are known as keywords, and @samp{gettext}
is preferred for the @kbd{M-.} command.  In fact, this is not useful to
prefer @samp{_}, as this one is already built in the @kbd{M-,} command.

@node c-format, Special cases, Marking, Sources
@section Special Comments preceding Keywords

@c FIXME document c-format and no-c-format.

@cindex format strings
In C programs strings are often used within calls of functions from the
@code{printf} family.  The special thing about these format strings is
that they can contain format specifiers introduced with @kbd{%}.  Assume
we have the code

@example
printf (gettext ("String `%s' has %d characters\n"), s, strlen (s));
@end example

@noindent
A possible German translation for the above string might be:

@example
"%d Zeichen lang ist die Zeichenkette `%s'"
@end example

A C programmer, even if he cannot speak German, will recognize that
there is something wrong here.  The order of the two format specifiers
is changed but of course the arguments in the @code{printf} don't have.
This will most probably lead to problems because now the length of the
string is regarded as the address.

To prevent errors at runtime caused by translations the @code{msgfmt}
tool can check statically whether the arguments in the original and the
translation string match in type and number.  If this is not the case
and the @samp{-c} option has been passed to @code{msgfmt}, @code{msgfmt}
will give an error and refuse to produce a MO file.  Thus consequent
use of @samp{msgfmt -c} will catch the error, so that it cannot cause
cause problems at runtime.

@noindent
If the word order in the above German translation would be correct one
would have to write

@example
"%2$d Zeichen lang ist die Zeichenkette `%1$s'"
@end example

@noindent
The routines in @code{msgfmt} know about this special notation.

Because not all strings in a program must be format strings it is not
useful for @code{msgfmt} to test all the strings in the @file{.po} file.
This might cause problems because the string might contain what looks
like a format specifier, but the string is not used in @code{printf}.

Therefore the @code{xgettext} adds a special tag to those messages it
thinks might be a format string.  There is no absolute rule for this,
only a heuristic.  In the @file{.po} file the entry is marked using the
@code{c-format} flag in the @kbd{#,} comment line (@pxref{PO Files}).

@kwindex c-format@r{, and @code{xgettext}}
@kwindex no-c-format@r{, and @code{xgettext}}
The careful reader now might say that this again can cause problems.
The heuristic might guess it wrong.  This is true and therefore
@code{xgettext} knows about special kind of comment which lets
the programmer take over the decision.  If in the same line or
the immediately preceding line of the @code{gettext} keyword
the @code{xgettext} program find a comment containing the words
@kbd{xgettext:c-format} it will mark the string in any case with
the @kbd{c-format} flag.  This kind of comment should be used when
@code{xgettext} does not recognize the string as a format string but
is really is one and it should be tested.  Please note that when the
comment is in the same line of the @code{gettext} keyword, it must be
before the string to be translated.

This situation happens quite often.  The @code{printf} function is often
called with strings which do not contain a format specifier.  Of course
one would normally use @code{fputs} but it does happen.  In this case
@code{xgettext} does not recognize this as a format string but what
happens if the translation introduces a valid format specifier?  The
@code{printf} function will try to access one of the parameter but none
exists because the original code does not refer to any parameter.

@code{xgettext} of course could make a wrong decision the other way
round, i.e. a string marked as a format string actually is not a format
string.  In this case the @code{msgfmt} might give too many warnings and
would prevent translating the @file{.po} file.  The method to prevent
this wrong decision is similar to the one used above, only the comment
to use must contain the string @kbd{xgettext:no-c-format}.

If a string is marked with @kbd{c-format} and this is not correct the
user can find out who is responsible for the decision.  See
@ref{xgettext Invocation} to see how the @kbd{--debug} option can be
used for solving this problem.

@node Special cases,  , c-format, Sources
@section Special Cases of Translatable Strings

@cindex marking string initializers
The attentive reader might now point out that it is not always possible
to mark translatable string with @code{gettext} or something like this.
Consider the following case:

@example
@group
@{
  static const char *messages[] = @{
    "some very meaningful message",
    "and another one"
  @};
  const char *string;
  @dots{}
  string
    = index > 1 ? "a default message" : messages[index];

  fputs (string);
  @dots{}
@}
@end group
@end example

While it is no problem to mark the string @code{"a default message"} it
is not possible to mark the string initializers for @code{messages}.
What is to be done?  We have to fulfill two tasks.  First we have to mark the
strings so that the @code{xgettext} program (@pxref{xgettext Invocation})
can find them, and second we have to translate the string at runtime
before printing them.

The first task can be fulfilled by creating a new keyword, which names a
no-op.  For the second we have to mark all access points to a string
from the array.  So one solution can look like this:

@example
@group
#define gettext_noop(String) String

@{
  static const char *messages[] = @{
    gettext_noop ("some very meaningful message"),
    gettext_noop ("and another one")
  @};
  const char *string;
  @dots{}
  string
    = index > 1 ? gettext ("a default message") : gettext (messages[index]);

  fputs (string);
  @dots{}
@}
@end group
@end example

Please convince yourself that the string which is written by
@code{fputs} is translated in any case.  How to get @code{xgettext} know
the additional keyword @code{gettext_noop} is explained in @ref{xgettext
Invocation}.

The above is of course not the only solution.  You could also come along
with the following one:

@example
@group
#define gettext_noop(String) String

@{
  static const char *messages[] = @{
    gettext_noop ("some very meaningful message",
    gettext_noop ("and another one")
  @};
  const char *string;
  @dots{}
  string
    = index > 1 ? gettext_noop ("a default message") : messages[index];

  fputs (gettext (string));
  @dots{}
@}
@end group
@end example

But this has a drawback.  The programmer has to take care that
he uses @code{gettext_noop} for the string @code{"a default message"}.
A use of @code{gettext} could have in rare cases unpredictable results.

One advantage is that you need not make control flow analysis to make
sure the output is really translated in any case.  But this analysis is
generally not very difficult.  If it should be in any situation you can
use this second method in this situation.

@node Template, Creating, Sources, Top
@chapter Making the PO Template File
@cindex PO template file

After preparing the sources, the programmer creates a PO template file.
This section explains how to use @code{xgettext} for this purpose.

@c FIXME: Rewrite.

@menu
* xgettext Invocation::         Invoking the @code{xgettext} Program
@end menu

@node xgettext Invocation,  , Template, Template
@section Invoking the @code{xgettext} Program

@include xgettext.texi

@node Creating, Updating, Template, Top
@chapter Creating a New PO File
@cindex creating a new PO file

When starting a new translation, the translator creates a file called
@file{@var{LANG}.po}, as a copy of the @file{@var{package}.pot} template
file with modifications in the initial comments (at the beginning of the file)
and in the header entry (the first entry, near the beginning of the file).

The easiest way to do so is by use of the @samp{msginit} program.
For example:

@example
$ cd @var{PACKAGE}-@var{VERSION}
$ cd po
$ msginit --verbose
@end example

The alternative way is to do the copy and modifications by hand.
To do so, the translator copies @file{@var{package}.pot} to
@file{@var{LANG}.po}.  Then she modifies the initial comments and
the header entry of this file.

@menu
* msginit Invocation::          Invoking the @code{msginit} Program
* Header Entry::                Filling in the Header Entry
@end menu

@node msginit Invocation, Header Entry, Creating, Creating
@section Invoking the @code{msginit} Program

@include msginit.texi

@node Header Entry,  , msginit Invocation, Creating
@section Filling in the Header Entry
@cindex header entry of a PO file

The initial comments "SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE", "YEAR" and
"FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@@ADDRESS>, YEAR" ought to be replaced by sensible
information.  This can be done in any text editor; if Emacs is used
and it switched to PO mode automatically (because it has recognized
the file's suffix), you can disable it by typing @kbd{M-x fundamental-mode}.

Modifying the header entry can already be done using PO mode: in Emacs,
type @kbd{M-x po-mode RET} and then @kbd{RET} again to start editing the
entry.  You should fill in the following fields.

@table @asis
@item Project-Id-Version
This is the name and version of the package.

@item POT-Creation-Date
This has already been filled in by @code{xgettext}.

@item PO-Revision-Date
You don't need to fill this in. It will be filled by the Emacs PO mode
when you save the file.

@item Last-Translator
Fill in your name and email address (without double quotes).

@item Language-Team
Fill in the English name of the language, and the email address or
homepage URL of the language team you are part of.

Before starting a translation, it is a good idea to get in touch with
your translation team, not only to make sure you don't do duplicated work,
but also to coordinate difficult linguistic issues.

@cindex list of translation teams, where to find
In the Free Translation Project, each translation team has its own mailing
list.  The up-to-date list of teams can be found at the Free Translation
Project's homepage, @uref{http://www.iro.umontreal.ca/contrib/po/HTML/},
in the "National teams" area.

@item Content-Type
@cindex encoding of PO files
@cindex charset of PO files
Replace @samp{CHARSET} with the character encoding used for your language,
in your locale, or UTF-8.  This field is needed for correct operation of the
@code{msgmerge} and @code{msgfmt} programs, as well as for users whose
locale's character encoding differs from yours (see @ref{Charset conversion}).

@cindex @code{locale} program
You get the character encoding of your locale by running the shell command
@samp{locale charmap}.  If the result is @samp{C} or @samp{ANSI_X3.4-1968},
which is equivalent to @samp{ASCII} (= @samp{US-ASCII}), it means that your
locale is not correctly configured.  In this case, ask your translation
team which charset to use.  @samp{ASCII} is not usable for any language
except Latin.

@cindex encoding list
Because the PO files must be portable to operating systems with less advanced
internationalization facilities, the character encodings that can be used
are limited to those supported by both GNU @code{libc} and GNU
@code{libiconv}. These are:
@code{ASCII}, @code{ISO-8859-1}, @code{ISO-8859-2}, @code{ISO-8859-3},
@code{ISO-8859-4}, @code{ISO-8859-5}, @code{ISO-8859-6}, @code{ISO-8859-7},
@code{ISO-8859-8}, @code{ISO-8859-9}, @code{ISO-8859-13}, @code{ISO-8859-15},
@code{KOI8-R}, @code{KOI8-U}, @code{CP850}, @code{CP866}, @code{CP874},
@code{CP932}, @code{CP949}, @code{CP950}, @code{CP1250}, @code{CP1251},
@code{CP1252}, @code{CP1253}, @code{CP1254}, @code{CP1255}, @code{CP1256},
@code{CP1257}, @code{GB2312}, @code{EUC-JP}, @code{EUC-KR}, @code{EUC-TW},
@code{BIG5}, @code{BIG5-HKSCS}, @code{GBK}, @code{GB18030}, @code{SHIFT_JIS},
@code{JOHAB}, @code{TIS-620}, @code{VISCII}, @code{UTF-8}.

@c This data is taken from glibc/localedata/SUPPORTED.
@cindex Linux
In the GNU system, the following encodings are frequently used for the
corresponding languages.

@cindex encoding for your language
@itemize
@item @code{ISO-8859-1} for
 Afrikaans, Albanian, Basque, Catalan, Dutch, English, Estonian, Faroese,
 Finnish, French, Galician, German, Greenlandic, Icelandic, Indonesian,
 Irish, Italian, Malay, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish, Swedish,
@item @code{ISO-8859-2} for
 Croatian, Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Romanian, Serbian, Slovak, Slovenian,
@item @code{ISO-8859-3} for Maltese,
@item @code{ISO-8859-5} for Macedonian, Serbian,
@item @code{ISO-8859-6} for Arabic,
@item @code{ISO-8859-7} for Greek,
@item @code{ISO-8859-8} for Hebrew,
@item @code{ISO-8859-9} for Turkish,
@item @code{ISO-8859-13} for Latvian, Lithuanian,
@item @code{ISO-8859-15} for
 Basque, Catalan, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Irish,
 Italian, Portuguese, Spanish, Swedish,
@item @code{KOI8-R} for Russian,
@item @code{KOI8-U} for Ukrainian,
@item @code{CP1251} for Bulgarian, Byelorussian,
@item @code{GB2312}, @code{GBK}, @code{GB18030}
 for simplified writing of Chinese,
@item @code{BIG5}, @code{BIG5-HKSCS}
 for traditional writing of Chinese,
@item @code{EUC-JP} for Japanese,
@item @code{EUC-KR} for Korean,
@item @code{TIS-620} for Thai,
@item @code{UTF-8} for any language, including those listed above.
@end itemize

@cindex quote characters, use in PO files
@cindex quotation marks
When single quote characters or double quote characters are used in
translations for your language, and your locale's encoding is one of the
ISO-8859-* charsets, it is best if you create your PO files in UTF-8
encoding, instead of your locale's encoding.  This is because in UTF-8
the real quote characters can be represented (single quote characters:
U+2018, U+2019, double quote characters: U+201C, U+201D), whereas none of
ISO-8859-* charsets has them all.  Users in UTF-8 locales will see the
real quote characters, whereas users in ISO-8859-* locales will see the
vertical apostrophe and the vertical double quote instead (because that's
what the character set conversion will transliterate them to).

@cindex @code{xmodmap} program, and typing quotation marks
To enter such quote characters under X11, you can change your keyboard
mapping using the @code{xmodmap} program.  The X11 names of the quote
characters are "leftsinglequotemark", "rightsinglequotemark",
"leftdoublequotemark", "rightdoublequotemark", "singlelowquotemark",
"doublelowquotemark".

Note that only recent versions of GNU Emacs support the UTF-8 encoding:
Emacs 20 with Mule-UCS, and Emacs 21.  As of January 2001, XEmacs doesn't
support the UTF-8 encoding.

The character encoding name can be written in either upper or lower case.
Usually upper case is preferred.

@item Content-Transfer-Encoding
Set this to @code{8bit}.

@item Plural-Forms
This field is optional.  It is only needed if the PO file has plural forms.
You can find them by searching for the @samp{msgid_plural} keyword.  The
format of the plural forms field is described in @ref{Plural forms}.
@end table

@node Updating, Manipulating, Creating, Top
@chapter Updating Existing PO Files

@c FIXME: Rewrite.

@menu
* msgmerge Invocation::         Invoking the @code{msgmerge} Program
* Translated Entries::          Translated Entries
* Fuzzy Entries::               Fuzzy Entries
* Untranslated Entries::        Untranslated Entries
* Obsolete Entries::            Obsolete Entries
* Modifying Translations::      Modifying Translations
* Modifying Comments::          Modifying Comments
* Subedit::                     Mode for Editing Translations
* C Sources Context::           C Sources Context
* Auxiliary::                   Consulting Auxiliary PO Files
* Compendium::                  Using Translation Compendia
@end menu

@node msgmerge Invocation, Translated Entries, Updating, Updating
@section Invoking the @code{msgmerge} Program

@include msgmerge.texi

@node Translated Entries, Fuzzy Entries, msgmerge Invocation, Updating
@section Translated Entries
@cindex translated entries

Each PO file entry for which the @code{msgstr} field has been filled with
a translation, and which is not marked as fuzzy (@pxref{Fuzzy Entries}),
is said to be a @dfn{translated} entry.  Only translated entries will
later be compiled by GNU @code{msgfmt} and become usable in programs.
Other entry types will be excluded; translation will not occur for them.

@emindex moving by translated entries
Some commands are more specifically related to translated entry processing.

@table @kbd
@item t
@efindex t@r{, PO Mode command}
Find the next translated entry (@code{po-next-translated-entry}).

@item T
@efindex T@r{, PO Mode command}
Find the previous translated entry (@code{po-previous-translated-entry}).

@end table

@efindex t@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-next-translated-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex T@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-previous-translated-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
The commands @kbd{t} (@code{po-next-translated-entry}) and @kbd{T}
(@code{po-previous-translated-entry}) move forwards or backwards, chasing
for an translated entry.  If none is found, the search is extended and
wraps around in the PO file buffer.

@evindex po-auto-fuzzy-on-edit@r{, PO Mode variable}
Translated entries usually result from the translator having edited in
a translation for them, @ref{Modifying Translations}.  However, if the
variable @code{po-auto-fuzzy-on-edit} is not @code{nil}, the entry having
received a new translation first becomes a fuzzy entry, which ought to
be later unfuzzied before becoming an official, genuine translated entry.
@xref{Fuzzy Entries}.

@node Fuzzy Entries, Untranslated Entries, Translated Entries, Updating
@section Fuzzy Entries
@cindex fuzzy entries

@cindex attributes of a PO file entry
@cindex attribute, fuzzy
Each PO file entry may have a set of @dfn{attributes}, which are
qualities given a name and explicitely associated with the translation,
using a special system comment.  One of these attributes
has the name @code{fuzzy}, and entries having this attribute are said
to have a fuzzy translation.  They are called fuzzy entries, for short.

Fuzzy entries, even if they account for translated entries for
most other purposes, usually call for revision by the translator.
Those may be produced by applying the program @code{msgmerge} to
update an older translated PO files according to a new PO template
file, when this tool hypothesises that some new @code{msgid} has
been modified only slightly out of an older one, and chooses to pair
what it thinks to be the old translation for the new modified entry.
The slight alteration in the original string (the @code{msgid} string)
should often be reflected in the translated string, and this requires
the intervention of the translator.  For this reason, @code{msgmerge}
might mark some entries as being fuzzy.

@emindex moving by fuzzy entries
Also, the translator may decide herself to mark an entry as fuzzy
for her own convenience, when she wants to remember that the entry
has to be later revisited.  So, some commands are more specifically
related to fuzzy entry processing.

@table @kbd
@item z
@efindex z@r{, PO Mode command}
@c better append "-entry" all the time. -ke-
Find the next fuzzy entry (@code{po-next-fuzzy-entry}).

@item Z
@efindex Z@r{, PO Mode command}
Find the previous fuzzy entry (@code{po-previous-fuzzy-entry}).

@item @key{TAB}
@efindex TAB@r{, PO Mode command}
Remove the fuzzy attribute of the current entry (@code{po-unfuzzy}).

@end table

@efindex z@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-next-fuzzy-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex Z@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-previous-fuzzy-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
The commands @kbd{z} (@code{po-next-fuzzy-entry}) and @kbd{Z}
(@code{po-previous-fuzzy-entry}) move forwards or backwards, chasing for
a fuzzy entry.  If none is found, the search is extended and wraps
around in the PO file buffer.

@efindex TAB@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-unfuzzy@r{, PO Mode command}
@evindex po-auto-select-on-unfuzzy@r{, PO Mode variable}
The command @kbd{@key{TAB}} (@code{po-unfuzzy}) removes the fuzzy
attribute associated with an entry, usually leaving it translated.
Further, if the variable @code{po-auto-select-on-unfuzzy} has not
the @code{nil} value, the @kbd{@key{TAB}} command will automatically chase
for another interesting entry to work on.  The initial value of
@code{po-auto-select-on-unfuzzy} is @code{nil}.

The initial value of @code{po-auto-fuzzy-on-edit} is @code{nil}.  However,
if the variable @code{po-auto-fuzzy-on-edit} is set to @code{t}, any entry
edited through the @kbd{@key{RET}} command is marked fuzzy, as a way to
ensure some kind of double check, later.  In this case, the usual paradigm
is that an entry becomes fuzzy (if not already) whenever the translator
modifies it.  If she is satisfied with the translation, she then uses
@kbd{@key{TAB}} to pick another entry to work on, clearing the fuzzy attribute
on the same blow.  If she is not satisfied yet, she merely uses @kbd{@key{SPC}}
to chase another entry, leaving the entry fuzzy.

@efindex DEL@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-fade-out-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
The translator may also use the @kbd{@key{DEL}} command
(@code{po-fade-out-entry}) over any translated entry to mark it as being
fuzzy, when she wants to easily leave a trace she wants to later return
working at this entry.

Also, when time comes to quit working on a PO file buffer with the @kbd{q}
command, the translator is asked for confirmation, if fuzzy string
still exists.

@node Untranslated Entries, Obsolete Entries, Fuzzy Entries, Updating
@section Untranslated Entries
@cindex untranslated entries

When @code{xgettext} originally creates a PO file, unless told
otherwise, it initializes the @code{msgid} field with the untranslated
string, and leaves the @code{msgstr} string to be empty.  Such entries,
having an empty translation, are said to be @dfn{untranslated} entries.
Later, when the programmer slightly modifies some string right in
the program, this change is later reflected in the PO file
by the appearance of a new untranslated entry for the modified string.

The usual commands moving from entry to entry consider untranslated
entries on the same level as active entries.  Untranslated entries
are easily recognizable by the fact they end with @w{@samp{msgstr ""}}.

@emindex moving by untranslated entries
The work of the translator might be (quite naively) seen as the process
of seeking for an untranslated entry, editing a translation for
it, and repeating these actions until no untranslated entries remain.
Some commands are more specifically related to untranslated entry
processing.

@table @kbd
@item u
@efindex u@r{, PO Mode command}
Find the next untranslated entry (@code{po-next-untranslated-entry}).

@item U
@efindex U@r{, PO Mode command}
Find the previous untranslated entry (@code{po-previous-untransted-entry}).

@item k
@efindex k@r{, PO Mode command}
Turn the current entry into an untranslated one (@code{po-kill-msgstr}).

@end table

@efindex u@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-next-untranslated-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex U@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-previous-untransted-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
The commands @kbd{u} (@code{po-next-untranslated-entry}) and @kbd{U}
(@code{po-previous-untransted-entry}) move forwards or backwards,
chasing for an untranslated entry.  If none is found, the search is
extended and wraps around in the PO file buffer.

@efindex k@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-kill-msgstr@r{, PO Mode command}
An entry can be turned back into an untranslated entry by
merely emptying its translation, using the command @kbd{k}
(@code{po-kill-msgstr}).  @xref{Modifying Translations}.

Also, when time comes to quit working on a PO file buffer
with the @kbd{q} command, the translator is asked for confirmation,
if some untranslated string still exists.

@node Obsolete Entries, Modifying Translations, Untranslated Entries, Updating
@section Obsolete Entries
@cindex obsolete entries

By @dfn{obsolete} PO file entries, we mean those entries which are
commented out, usually by @code{msgmerge} when it found that the
translation is not needed anymore by the package being localized.

The usual commands moving from entry to entry consider obsolete
entries on the same level as active entries.  Obsolete entries are
easily recognizable by the fact that all their lines start with
@kbd{#}, even those lines containing @code{msgid} or @code{msgstr}.

Commands exist for emptying the translation or reinitializing it
to the original untranslated string.  Commands interfacing with the
kill ring may force some previously saved text into the translation.
The user may interactively edit the translation.  All these commands
may apply to obsolete entries, carefully leaving the entry obsolete
after the fact.

@emindex moving by obsolete entries
Moreover, some commands are more specifically related to obsolete
entry processing.

@table @kbd
@item o
@efindex o@r{, PO Mode command}
Find the next obsolete entry (@code{po-next-obsolete-entry}).

@item O
@efindex O@r{, PO Mode command}
Find the previous obsolete entry (@code{po-previous-obsolete-entry}).

@item @key{DEL}
@efindex DEL@r{, PO Mode command}
Make an active entry obsolete, or zap out an obsolete entry
(@code{po-fade-out-entry}).

@end table

@efindex o@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-next-obsolete-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex O@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-previous-obsolete-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
The commands @kbd{o} (@code{po-next-obsolete-entry}) and @kbd{O}
(@code{po-previous-obsolete-entry}) move forwards or backwards,
chasing for an obsolete entry.  If none is found, the search is
extended and wraps around in the PO file buffer.

PO mode does not provide ways for un-commenting an obsolete entry
and making it active, because this would reintroduce an original
untranslated string which does not correspond to any marked string
in the program sources.  This goes with the philosophy of never
introducing useless @code{msgid} values.

@efindex DEL@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-fade-out-entry@r{, PO Mode command}
@emindex obsolete active entry
@emindex comment out PO file entry
However, it is possible to comment out an active entry, so making
it obsolete.  GNU @code{gettext} utilities will later react to the
disappearance of a translation by using the untranslated string.
The command @kbd{@key{DEL}} (@code{po-fade-out-entry}) pushes the current entry
a little further towards annihilation.  If the entry is active (it is a
translated entry), then it is first made fuzzy.  If it is already fuzzy,
then the entry is merely commented out, with confirmation.  If the entry
is already obsolete, then it is completely deleted from the PO file.
It is easy to recycle the translation so deleted into some other PO file
entry, usually one which is untranslated.  @xref{Modifying Translations}.

Here is a quite interesting problem to solve for later development of
PO mode, for those nights you are not sleepy.  The idea would be that
PO mode might become bright enough, one of these days, to make good
guesses at retrieving the most probable candidate, among all obsolete
entries, for initializing the translation of a newly appeared string.
I think it might be a quite hard problem to do this algorithmically, as
we have to develop good and efficient measures of string similarity.
Right now, PO mode completely lets the decision to the translator,
when the time comes to find the adequate obsolete translation, it
merely tries to provide handy tools for helping her to do so.

@node Modifying Translations, Modifying Comments, Obsolete Entries, Updating
@section Modifying Translations
@cindex editing translations
@emindex editing translations

PO mode prevents direct modification of the PO file, by the usual
means Emacs gives for altering a buffer's contents.  By doing so,
it pretends helping the translator to avoid little clerical errors
about the overall file format, or the proper quoting of strings,
as those errors would be easily made.  Other kinds of errors are
still possible, but some may be caught and diagnosed by the batch
validation process, which the translator may always trigger by the
@kbd{V} command.  For all other errors, the translator has to rely on
her own judgment, and also on the linguistic reports submitted to her
by the users of the translated package, having the same mother tongue.

When the time comes to create a translation, correct an error diagnosed
mechanically or reported by a user, the translators have to resort to
using the following commands for modifying the translations.

@table @kbd
@item @key{RET}
@efindex RET@r{, PO Mode command}
Interactively edit the translation (@code{po-edit-msgstr}).

@item @key{LFD}
@itemx C-j
@efindex LFD@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex C-j@r{, PO Mode command}
Reinitialize the translation with the original, untranslated string
(@code{po-msgid-to-msgstr}).

@item k
@efindex k@r{, PO Mode command}
Save the translation on the kill ring, and delete it (@code{po-kill-msgstr}).

@item w
@efindex w@r{, PO Mode command}
Save the translation on the kill ring, without deleting it
(@code{po-kill-ring-save-msgstr}).

@item y
@efindex y@r{, PO Mode command}
Replace the translation, taking the new from the kill ring
(@code{po-yank-msgstr}).

@end table

@efindex RET@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-edit-msgstr@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{@key{RET}} (@code{po-edit-msgstr}) opens a new Emacs
window meant to edit in a new translation, or to modify an already existing
translation.  The new window contains a copy of the translation taken from
the current PO file entry, all ready for edition, expunged of all quoting
marks, fully modifiable and with the complete extent of Emacs modifying
commands.  When the translator is done with her modifications, she may use
@w{@kbd{C-c C-c}} to close the subedit window with the automatically requoted
results, or @w{@kbd{C-c C-k}} to abort her modifications.  @xref{Subedit},
for more information.

@efindex LFD@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex C-j@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-msgid-to-msgstr@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{@key{LFD}} (@code{po-msgid-to-msgstr}) initializes, or
reinitializes the translation with the original string.  This command is
normally used when the translator wants to redo a fresh translation of
the original string, disregarding any previous work.

@evindex po-auto-edit-with-msgid@r{, PO Mode variable}
It is possible to arrange so, whenever editing an untranslated
entry, the @kbd{@key{LFD}} command be automatically executed.  If you set
@code{po-auto-edit-with-msgid} to @code{t}, the translation gets
initialised with the original string, in case none exists already.
The default value for @code{po-auto-edit-with-msgid} is @code{nil}.

@emindex starting a string translation
In fact, whether it is best to start a translation with an empty
string, or rather with a copy of the original string, is a matter of
taste or habit.  Sometimes, the source language and the
target language are so different that is simply best to start writing
on an empty page.  At other times, the source and target languages
are so close that it would be a waste to retype a number of words
already being written in the original string.  A translator may also
like having the original string right under her eyes, as she will
progressively overwrite the original text with the translation, even
if this requires some extra editing work to get rid of the original.

@emindex cut and paste for translated strings
@efindex k@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-kill-msgstr@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex w@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-kill-ring-save-msgstr@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{k} (@code{po-kill-msgstr}) merely empties the
translation string, so turning the entry into an untranslated
one.  But while doing so, its previous contents is put apart in
a special place, known as the kill ring.  The command @kbd{w}
(@code{po-kill-ring-save-msgstr}) has also the effect of taking a
copy of the translation onto the kill ring, but it otherwise leaves
the entry alone, and does @emph{not} remove the translation from the
entry.  Both commands use exactly the Emacs kill ring, which is shared
between buffers, and which is well known already to Emacs lovers.

The translator may use @kbd{k} or @kbd{w} many times in the course
of her work, as the kill ring may hold several saved translations.
From the kill ring, strings may later be reinserted in various
Emacs buffers.  In particular, the kill ring may be used for moving
translation strings between different entries of a single PO file
buffer, or if the translator is handling many such buffers at once,
even between PO files.

To facilitate exchanges with buffers which are not in PO mode, the
translation string put on the kill ring by the @kbd{k} command is fully
unquoted before being saved: external quotes are removed, multi-line
strings are concatenated, and backslash escaped sequences are turned
into their corresponding characters.  In the special case of obsolete
entries, the translation is also uncommented prior to saving.

@efindex y@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-yank-msgstr@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{y} (@code{po-yank-msgstr}) completely replaces the
translation of the current entry by a string taken from the kill ring.
Following Emacs terminology, we then say that the replacement
string is @dfn{yanked} into the PO file buffer.
@xref{Yanking, , , emacs, The Emacs Editor}.
The first time @kbd{y} is used, the translation receives the value of
the most recent addition to the kill ring.  If @kbd{y} is typed once
again, immediately, without intervening keystrokes, the translation
just inserted is taken away and replaced by the second most recent
addition to the kill ring.  By repeating @kbd{y} many times in a row,
the translator may travel along the kill ring for saved strings,
until she finds the string she really wanted.

When a string is yanked into a PO file entry, it is fully and
automatically requoted for complying with the format PO files should
have.  Further, if the entry is obsolete, PO mode then appropriately
push the inserted string inside comments.  Once again, translators
should not burden themselves with quoting considerations besides, of
course, the necessity of the translated string itself respective to
the program using it.

Note that @kbd{k} or @kbd{w} are not the only commands pushing strings
on the kill ring, as almost any PO mode command replacing translation
strings (or the translator comments) automatically saves the old string
on the kill ring.  The main exceptions to this general rule are the
yanking commands themselves.

@emindex using obsolete translations to make new entries
To better illustrate the operation of killing and yanking, let's
use an actual example, taken from a common situation.  When the
programmer slightly modifies some string right in the program, his
change is later reflected in the PO file by the appearance
of a new untranslated entry for the modified string, and the fact
that the entry translating the original or unmodified string becomes
obsolete.  In many cases, the translator might spare herself some work
by retrieving the unmodified translation from the obsolete entry,
then initializing the untranslated entry @code{msgstr} field with
this retrieved translation.  Once this done, the obsolete entry is
not wanted anymore, and may be safely deleted.

When the translator finds an untranslated entry and suspects that a
slight variant of the translation exists, she immediately uses @kbd{m}
to mark the current entry location, then starts chasing obsolete
entries with @kbd{o}, hoping to find some translation corresponding
to the unmodified string.  Once found, she uses the @kbd{@key{DEL}} command
for deleting the obsolete entry, knowing that @kbd{@key{DEL}} also @emph{kills}
the translation, that is, pushes the translation on the kill ring.
Then, @kbd{r} returns to the initial untranslated entry, and @kbd{y}
then @emph{yanks} the saved translation right into the @code{msgstr}
field.  The translator is then free to use @kbd{@key{RET}} for fine
tuning the translation contents, and maybe to later use @kbd{u},
then @kbd{m} again, for going on with the next untranslated string.

When some sequence of keys has to be typed over and over again, the
translator may find it useful to become better acquainted with the Emacs
capability of learning these sequences and playing them back under request.
@xref{Keyboard Macros, , , emacs, The Emacs Editor}.

@node Modifying Comments, Subedit, Modifying Translations, Updating
@section Modifying Comments
@cindex editing comments in PO files
@emindex editing comments

Any translation work done seriously will raise many linguistic
difficulties, for which decisions have to be made, and the choices
further documented.  These documents may be saved within the
PO file in form of translator comments, which the translator
is free to create, delete, or modify at will.  These comments may
be useful to herself when she returns to this PO file after a while.

Comments not having whitespace after the initial @samp{#}, for example,
those beginning with @samp{#.} or @samp{#:}, are @emph{not} translator
comments, they are exclusively created by other @code{gettext} tools.
So, the commands below will never alter such system added comments,
they are not meant for the translator to modify.  @xref{PO Files}.

The following commands are somewhat similar to those modifying translations,
so the general indications given for those apply here.  @xref{Modifying
Translations}.

@table @kbd

@item #
@efindex #@r{, PO Mode command}
Interactively edit the translator comments (@code{po-edit-comment}).

@item K
@efindex K@r{, PO Mode command}
Save the translator comments on the kill ring, and delete it
(@code{po-kill-comment}).

@item W
@efindex W@r{, PO Mode command}
Save the translator comments on the kill ring, without deleting it
(@code{po-kill-ring-save-comment}).

@item Y
@efindex Y@r{, PO Mode command}
Replace the translator comments, taking the new from the kill ring
(@code{po-yank-comment}).

@end table

These commands parallel PO mode commands for modifying the translation
strings, and behave much the same way as they do, except that they handle
this part of PO file comments meant for translator usage, rather
than the translation strings.  So, if the descriptions given below are
slightly succinct, it is because the full details have already been given.
@xref{Modifying Translations}.

@efindex #@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-edit-comment@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{#} (@code{po-edit-comment}) opens a new Emacs window
containing a copy of the translator comments on the current PO file entry.
If there are no such comments, PO mode understands that the translator wants
to add a comment to the entry, and she is presented with an empty screen.
Comment marks (@kbd{#}) and the space following them are automatically
removed before edition, and reinstated after.  For translator comments
pertaining to obsolete entries, the uncommenting and recommenting operations
are done twice.  Once in the editing window, the keys @w{@kbd{C-c C-c}}
allow the translator to tell she is finished with editing the comment.
@xref{Subedit}, for further details.

@evindex po-subedit-mode-hook@r{, PO Mode variable}
Functions found on @code{po-subedit-mode-hook}, if any, are executed after
the string has been inserted in the edit buffer.

@efindex K@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-kill-comment@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex W@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-kill-ring-save-comment@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex Y@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-yank-comment@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{K} (@code{po-kill-comment}) gets rid of all
translator comments, while saving those comments on the kill ring.
The command @kbd{W} (@code{po-kill-ring-save-comment}) takes
a copy of the translator comments on the kill ring, but leaves
them undisturbed in the current entry.  The command @kbd{Y}
(@code{po-yank-comment}) completely replaces the translator comments
by a string taken at the front of the kill ring.  When this command
is immediately repeated, the comments just inserted are withdrawn,
and replaced by other strings taken along the kill ring.

On the kill ring, all strings have the same nature.  There is no
distinction between @emph{translation} strings and @emph{translator
comments} strings.  So, for example, let's presume the translator
has just finished editing a translation, and wants to create a new
translator comment to document why the previous translation was
not good, just to remember what was the problem.  Foreseeing that she
will do that in her documentation, the translator may want to quote
the previous translation in her translator comments.  To do so, she
may initialize the translator comments with the previous translation,
still at the head of the kill ring.  Because editing already pushed the
previous translation on the kill ring, she merely has to type @kbd{M-w}
prior to @kbd{#}, and the previous translation will be right there,
all ready for being introduced by some explanatory text.

On the other hand, presume there are some translator comments already
and that the translator wants to add to those comments, instead
of wholly replacing them.  Then, she should edit the comment right
away with @kbd{#}.  Once inside the editing window, she can use the
regular Emacs commands @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) and @kbd{M-y}
(@code{yank-pop}) to get the previous translation where she likes.

@node Subedit, C Sources Context, Modifying Comments, Updating
@section Details of Sub Edition
@emindex subedit minor mode

The PO subedit minor mode has a few peculiarities worth being described
in fuller detail.  It installs a few commands over the usual editing set
of Emacs, which are described below.

@table @kbd
@item C-c C-c
@efindex C-c C-c@r{, PO Mode command}
Complete edition (@code{po-subedit-exit}).

@item C-c C-k
@efindex C-c C-k@r{, PO Mode command}
Abort edition (@code{po-subedit-abort}).

@item C-c C-a
@efindex C-c C-a@r{, PO Mode command}
Consult auxiliary PO files (@code{po-subedit-cycle-auxiliary}).

@end table

@emindex exiting PO subedit
@efindex C-c C-c@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-subedit-exit@r{, PO Mode command}
The window's contents represents a translation for a given message,
or a translator comment.  The translator may modify this window to
her heart's content.  Once this is done, the command @w{@kbd{C-c C-c}}
(@code{po-subedit-exit}) may be used to return the edited translation into
the PO file, replacing the original translation, even if it moved out of
sight or if buffers were switched.

@efindex C-c C-k@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-subedit-abort@r{, PO Mode command}
If the translator becomes unsatisfied with her translation or comment,
to the extent she prefers keeping what was existent prior to the
@kbd{@key{RET}} or @kbd{#} command, she may use the command @w{@kbd{C-c C-k}}
(@code{po-subedit-abort}) to merely get rid of edition, while preserving
the original translation or comment.  Another way would be for her to exit
normally with @w{@kbd{C-c C-c}}, then type @code{U} once for undoing the
whole effect of last edition.

@efindex C-c C-a@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-subedit-cycle-auxiliary@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @w{@kbd{C-c C-a}} (@code{po-subedit-cycle-auxiliary})
allows for glancing through translations
already achieved in other languages, directly while editing the current
translation.  This may be quite convenient when the translator is fluent
at many languages, but of course, only makes sense when such completed
auxiliary PO files are already available to her (@pxref{Auxiliary}).

Functions found on @code{po-subedit-mode-hook}, if any, are executed after
the string has been inserted in the edit buffer.

While editing her translation, the translator should pay attention to not
inserting unwanted @kbd{@key{RET}} (newline) characters at the end of
the translated string if those are not meant to be there, or to removing
such characters when they are required.  Since these characters are not
visible in the editing buffer, they are easily introduced by mistake.
To help her, @kbd{@key{RET}} automatically puts the character @kbd{<}
at the end of the string being edited, but this @kbd{<} is not really
part of the string.  On exiting the editing window with @w{@kbd{C-c C-c}},
PO mode automatically removes such @kbd{<} and all whitespace added after
it.  If the translator adds characters after the terminating @kbd{<}, it
looses its delimiting property and integrally becomes part of the string.
If she removes the delimiting @kbd{<}, then the edited string is taken
@emph{as is}, with all trailing newlines, even if invisible.  Also, if
the translated string ought to end itself with a genuine @kbd{<}, then
the delimiting @kbd{<} may not be removed; so the string should appear,
in the editing window, as ending with two @kbd{<} in a row.

@emindex editing multiple entries
When a translation (or a comment) is being edited, the translator may move
the cursor back into the PO file buffer and freely move to other entries,
browsing at will.  If, with an edition pending, the translator wanders in the
PO file buffer, she may decide to start modifying another entry.  Each entry
being edited has its own subedit buffer.  It is possible to simultaneously
edit the translation @emph{and} the comment of a single entry, or to
edit entries in different PO files, all at once.  Typing @kbd{@key{RET}}
on a field already being edited merely resumes that particular edit.  Yet,
the translator should better be comfortable at handling many Emacs windows!

@emindex pending subedits
Pending subedits may be completed or aborted in any order, regardless
of how or when they were started.  When many subedits are pending and the
translator asks for quitting the PO file (with the @kbd{q} command), subedits
are automatically resumed one at a time, so she may decide for each of them.

@node C Sources Context, Auxiliary, Subedit, Updating
@section C Sources Context
@emindex consulting program sources
@emindex looking at the source to aid translation
@emindex use the source, Luke

PO mode is particularily powerful when used with PO files
created through GNU @code{gettext} utilities, as those utilities
insert special comments in the PO files they generate.
Some of these special comments relate the PO file entry to
exactly where the untranslated string appears in the program sources.

When the translator gets to an untranslated entry, she is fairly
often faced with an original string which is not as informative as
it normally should be, being succinct, cryptic, or otherwise ambiguous.
Before chosing how to translate the string, she needs to understand
better what the string really means and how tight the translation has
to be.  Most of times, when problems arise, the only way left to make
her judgment is looking at the true program sources from where this
string originated, searching for surrounding comments the programmer
might have put in there, and looking around for helping clues of
@emph{any} kind.

Surely, when looking at program sources, the translator will receive
more help if she is a fluent programmer.  However, even if she is
not versed in programming and feels a little lost in C code, the
translator should not be shy at taking a look, once in a while.
It is most probable that she will still be able to find some of the
hints she needs.  She will learn quickly to not feel uncomfortable
in program code, paying more attention to programmer's comments,
variable and function names (if he dared chosing them well), and
overall organization, than to programmation itself.

@emindex find source fragment for a PO file entry
The following commands are meant to help the translator at getting
program source context for a PO file entry.

@table @kbd
@item s
@efindex s@r{, PO Mode command}
Resume the display of a program source context, or cycle through them
(@code{po-cycle-source-reference}).

@item M-s
@efindex M-s@r{, PO Mode command}
Display of a program source context selected by menu
(@code{po-select-source-reference}).

@item S
@efindex S@r{, PO Mode command}
Add a directory to the search path for source files
(@code{po-consider-source-path}).

@item M-S
@efindex M-S@r{, PO Mode command}
Delete a directory from the search path for source files
(@code{po-ignore-source-path}).

@end table

@efindex s@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-cycle-source-reference@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex M-s@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-select-source-reference@r{, PO Mode command}
The commands @kbd{s} (@code{po-cycle-source-reference}) and @kbd{M-s}
(@code{po-select-source-reference}) both open another window displaying
some source program file, and already positioned in such a way that
it shows an actual use of the string to be translated.  By doing
so, the command gives source program context for the string.  But if
the entry has no source context references, or if all references
are unresolved along the search path for program sources, then the
command diagnoses this as an error.

Even if @kbd{s} (or @kbd{M-s}) opens a new window, the cursor stays
in the PO file window.  If the translator really wants to
get into the program source window, she ought to do it explicitly,
maybe by using command @kbd{O}.

When @kbd{s} is typed for the first time, or for a PO file entry which
is different of the last one used for getting source context, then the
command reacts by giving the first context available for this entry,
if any.  If some context has already been recently displayed for the
current PO file entry, and the translator wandered off to do other
things, typing @kbd{s} again will merely resume, in another window,
the context last displayed.  In particular, if the translator moved
the cursor away from the context in the source file, the command will
bring the cursor back to the context.  By using @kbd{s} many times
in a row, with no other commands intervening, PO mode will cycle to
the next available contexts for this particular entry, getting back
to the first context once the last has been shown.

The command @kbd{M-s} behaves differently.  Instead of cycling through
references, it lets the translator choose a particular reference among
many, and displays that reference.  It is best used with completion,
if the translator types @kbd{@key{TAB}} immediately after @kbd{M-s}, in
response to the question, she will be offered a menu of all possible
references, as a reminder of which are the acceptable answers.
This command is useful only where there are really many contexts
available for a single string to translate.

@efindex S@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-consider-source-path@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex M-S@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-ignore-source-path@r{, PO Mode command}
Program source files are usually found relative to where the PO
file stands.  As a special provision, when this fails, the file is
also looked for, but relative to the directory immediately above it.
Those two cases take proper care of most PO files.  However, it might
happen that a PO file has been moved, or is edited in a different
place than its normal location.  When this happens, the translator
should tell PO mode in which directory normally sits the genuine PO
file.  Many such directories may be specified, and all together, they
constitute what is called the @dfn{search path} for program sources.
The command @kbd{S} (@code{po-consider-source-path}) is used to interactively
enter a new directory at the front of the search path, and the command
@kbd{M-S} (@code{po-ignore-source-path}) is used to select, with completion,
one of the directories she does not want anymore on the search path.

@node Auxiliary, Compendium, C Sources Context, Updating
@section Consulting Auxiliary PO Files
@emindex consulting translations to other languages

PO mode is able to help the knowledgeable translator, being fluent in
many languages, at taking advantage of translations already achieved
in other languages she just happens to know.  It provides these other
language translations as additional context for her own work.  Moreover,
it has features to ease the production of translations for many languages
at once, for translators preferring to work in this way.

@cindex auxiliary PO file
@emindex auxiliary PO file
An @dfn{auxiliary} PO file is an existing PO file meant for the same
package the translator is working on, but targeted to a different mother
tongue language.  Commands exist for declaring and handling auxiliary
PO files, and also for showing contexts for the entry under work.

Here are the auxiliary file commands available in PO mode.

@table @kbd
@item a
@efindex a@r{, PO Mode command}
Seek auxiliary files for another translation for the same entry
(@code{po-cycle-auxiliary}).

@item C-c C-a
@efindex C-c C-a@r{, PO Mode command}
Switch to a particular auxiliary file (@code{po-select-auxiliary}).

@item A
@efindex A@r{, PO Mode command}
Declare this PO file as an auxiliary file (@code{po-consider-as-auxiliary}).

@item M-A
@efindex M-A@r{, PO Mode command}
Remove this PO file from the list of auxiliary files
(@code{po-ignore-as-auxiliary}).

@end table

@efindex A@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-consider-as-auxiliary@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex M-A@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-ignore-as-auxiliary@r{, PO Mode command}
Command @kbd{A} (@code{po-consider-as-auxiliary}) adds the current
PO file to the list of auxiliary files, while command @kbd{M-A}
(@code{po-ignore-as-auxiliary} just removes it.

@efindex a@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-cycle-auxiliary@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{a} (@code{po-cycle-auxiliary}) seeks all auxiliary PO
files, round-robin, searching for a translated entry in some other language
having an @code{msgid} field identical as the one for the current entry.
The found PO file, if any, takes the place of the current PO file in
the display (its window gets on top).  Before doing so, the current PO
file is also made into an auxiliary file, if not already.  So, @kbd{a}
in this newly displayed PO file will seek another PO file, and so on,
so repeating @kbd{a} will eventually yield back the original PO file.

@efindex C-c C-a@r{, PO Mode command}
@efindex po-select-auxiliary@r{, PO Mode command}
The command @kbd{C-c C-a} (@code{po-select-auxiliary}) asks the translator
for her choice of a particular auxiliary file, with completion, and
then switches to that selected PO file.  The command also checks if
the selected file has an @code{msgid} field identical as the one for
the current entry, and if yes, this entry becomes current.  Otherwise,
the cursor of the selected file is left undisturbed.

For all this to work fully, auxiliary PO files will have to be normalized,
in that way that @code{msgid} fields should be written @emph{exactly}
the same way.  It is possible to write @code{msgid} fields in various
ways for representing the same string, different writing would break the
proper behaviour of the auxiliary file commands of PO mode.  This is not
expected to be much a problem in practice, as most existing PO files have
their @code{msgid} entries written by the same GNU @code{gettext} tools.

@efindex normalize@r{, PO Mode command}
However, PO files initially created by PO mode itself, while marking
strings in source files, are normalised differently.  So are PO
files resulting of the the @samp{M-x normalize} command.  Until these
discrepancies between PO mode and other GNU @code{gettext} tools get
fully resolved, the translator should stay aware of normalisation issues.

@node Compendium,  , Auxiliary, Updating
@section Using Translation Compendia
@emindex using translation compendia

@cindex compendium
A @dfn{compendium} is a special PO file containing a set of
translations recurring in many different packages.  The translator can
use gettext tools to build a new compendium, to add entries to her
compendium, and to initialize untranslated entries, or to update
already translated entries, from translations kept in the compendium.

@menu
* Creating Compendia::          Merging translations for later use
* Using Compendia::             Using older translations if they fit
@end menu

@node Creating Compendia, Using Compendia, Compendium, Compendium
@subsection Creating Compendia
@cindex creating compendia
@cindex compendium, creating

Basically every PO file consisting of translated entries only can be
declared as a valid compendium.  Often the translator wants to have
special compendia; let's consider two cases: @cite{concatenating PO
files} and @cite{extracting a message subset from a PO file}.

@subsubsection Concatenate PO Files

@cindex concatenating PO files into a compendium
@cindex accumulating translations
To concatenate several valid PO files into one compendium file you can
use @samp{msgcomm} or @samp{msgcat} (the latter preferred):

@example
msgcat -o compendium.po file1.po file2.po
@end example

By default, @code{msgcat} will accumulate divergent translations
for the same string.  Those occurences will be marked as @code{fuzzy}
and highly visible decorated; calling @code{msgcat} on
@file{file1.po}:

@example
#: src/hello.c:200
#, c-format
msgid "Report bugs to <%s>.\n"
msgstr "Comunicar `bugs' a <%s>.\n"
@end example

@noindent
and @file{file2.po}:

@example
#: src/bye.c:100
#, c-format
msgid "Report bugs to <%s>.\n"
msgstr "Comunicar \"bugs\" a <%s>.\n"
@end example

@noindent
will result in:

@example
#: src/hello.c:200 src/bye.c:100
#, fuzzy, c-format
msgid "Report bugs to <%s>.\n"
msgstr ""
"#-#-#-#-#  file1.po  #-#-#-#-#\n"
"Comunicar `bugs' a <%s>.\n"
"#-#-#-#-#  file2.po  #-#-#-#-#\n"
"Comunicar \"bugs\" a <%s>.\n"
@end example

@noindent
The translator will have to resolve this ``conflict'' manually; she
has to decide whether the first or the second version is appropriate
(or provide a new translation), to delete the ``marker lines'', and
finally to remove the @code{fuzzy} mark.

If the translator knows in advance the first found translation of a
message is always the best translation she can make use to the
@samp{--use-first} switch:

@example
msgcat --use-first -o compendium.po file1.po file2.po
@end example

A good compendium file must not contain @code{fuzzy} or untranslated
entries.  If input files are ``dirty'' you must preprocess the input
files or postprocess the result using @samp{msgattrib --translated --no-fuzzy}.

@subsubsection Extract a Message Subset from a PO File
@cindex extracting parts of a PO file into a compendium

Nobody wants to translate the same messages again and again; thus you
may wish to have a compendium file containing @file{getopt.c} messages.

To extract a message subset (e.g., all @file{getopt.c} messages) from an
existing PO file into one compendium file you can use @samp{msggrep}:

@example
msggrep --location src/getopt.c -o compendium.po file.po
@end example

@node Using Compendia,  , Creating Compendia, Compendium
@subsection Using Compendia

You can use a compendium file to initialize a translation from scratch
or to update an already existing translation.

@subsubsection Initialize a New Translation File
@cindex initialize translations from a compendium

Since a PO file with translations does not exist the translator can
merely use @file{/dev/null} to fake the ``old'' translation file.

@example
msgmerge --compendium compendium.po -o file.po /dev/null file.pot
@end example

@subsubsection Update an Existing Translation File
@cindex update translations from a compendium

Concatenate the compendium file(s) and the existing PO, merge the
result with the POT file and remove the obsolete entries (optional,
here done using @samp{sed}):

@example
msgcat --use-first -o update.po compendium1.po compendium2.po file.po
msgmerge update.po file.pot | sed -e '/^#~/d' > file.po
@end example

@node Manipulating, Binaries, Updating, Top
@chapter Manipulating PO Files
@cindex manipulating PO files

Sometimes it is necessary to manipulate PO files in a way that is better
performed automatically than by hand.  GNU @code{gettext} includes a
complete set of tools for this purpose.

@cindex merging two PO files
When merging two packages into a single package, the resulting POT file
will be the concatenation of the two packages' POT files.  Thus the
maintainer must concatenate the two existing package translations into
a single translation catalog, for each language.  This is best performed
using @samp{msgcat}.  It is then the translators' duty to deal with any
possible conflicts that arose during the merge.

@cindex encoding conversion
When a translator takes over the translation job from another translator,
but she uses a different character encoding in her locale, she will
convert the catalog to her character encoding.  This is best done through
the @samp{msgconv} program.

When a maintainer takes a source file with tagged messages from another
package, he should also take the existing translations for this source
file (and not let the translators do the same job twice).  One way to do
this is through @samp{msggrep}, another is to create a POT file for
that source file and use @samp{msgmerge}.

@cindex dialect
@cindex orthography
When a translator wants to adjust some translation catalog for a special
dialect or orthography --- for example, German as written in Switzerland
versus German as written in Germany --- she needs to apply some text
processing to every message in the catalog.  The tool for doing this is
@samp{msgfilter}.

Another use of @code{msgfilter} is to produce approximately the POT file for
which a given PO file was made.  This can be done through a filter command
like @samp{msgfilter sed -e d | sed -e '/^# /d'}.  Note that the original
POT file may have had different comments and different plural message counts,
that's why it's better to use the original POT file if available.

@cindex checking of translations
When a translator wants to check her translations, for example according
to orthography rules or using a non-interactive spell checker, she can do
so using the @samp{msgexec} program.

@cindex duplicate elimination
When third party tools create PO or POT files, sometimes duplicates cannot
be avoided.  But the GNU @code{gettext} tools give an error when they
encounter duplicate msgids in the same file and in the same domain.
To merge duplicates, the @samp{msguniq} program can be used.

@samp{msgcomm} is a more general tool for keeping or throwing away
duplicates, occurring in different files.

@samp{msgcmp} can be used to check whether a translation catalog is
completely translated.

@cindex attributes, manipulating
@samp{msgattrib} can be used to select and extract only the fuzzy
or untranslated messages of a translation catalog.

@samp{msgen} is useful as a first step for preparing English translation
catalogs.  It copies each message's msgid to its msgstr.

@menu
* msgcat Invocation::           Invoking the @code{msgcat} Program
* msgconv Invocation::          Invoking the @code{msgconv} Program
* msggrep Invocation::          Invoking the @code{msggrep} Program
* msgfilter Invocation::        Invoking the @code{msgfilter} Program
* msguniq Invocation::          Invoking the @code{msguniq} Program
* msgcomm Invocation::          Invoking the @code{msgcomm} Program
* msgcmp Invocation::           Invoking the @code{msgcmp} Program
* msgattrib Invocation::        Invoking the @code{msgattrib} Program
* msgen Invocation::            Invoking the @code{msgen} Program
* msgexec Invocation::          Invoking the @code{msgexec} Program
@end menu

@node msgcat Invocation, msgconv Invocation, Manipulating, Manipulating
@section Invoking the @code{msgcat} Program

@include msgcat.texi

@node msgconv Invocation, msggrep Invocation, msgcat Invocation, Manipulating
@section Invoking the @code{msgconv} Program

@include msgconv.texi

@node msggrep Invocation, msgfilter Invocation, msgconv Invocation, Manipulating
@section Invoking the @code{msggrep} Program

@include msggrep.texi

@node msgfilter Invocation, msguniq Invocation, msggrep Invocation, Manipulating
@section Invoking the @code{msgfilter} Program

@include msgfilter.texi

@node msguniq Invocation, msgcomm Invocation, msgfilter Invocation, Manipulating
@section Invoking the @code{msguniq} Program

@include msguniq.texi

@node msgcomm Invocation, msgcmp Invocation, msguniq Invocation, Manipulating
@section Invoking the @code{msgcomm} Program

@include msgcomm.texi

@node msgcmp Invocation, msgattrib Invocation, msgcomm Invocation, Manipulating
@section Invoking the @code{msgcmp} Program

@include msgcmp.texi

@node msgattrib Invocation, msgen Invocation, msgcmp Invocation, Manipulating
@section Invoking the @code{msgattrib} Program

@include msgattrib.texi

@node msgen Invocation, msgexec Invocation, msgattrib Invocation, Manipulating
@section Invoking the @code{msgen} Program

@include msgen.texi

@node msgexec Invocation,  , msgen Invocation, Manipulating
@section Invoking the @code{msgexec} Program

@include msgexec.texi

@node Binaries, Users, Manipulating, Top
@chapter Producing Binary MO Files

@c FIXME: Rewrite.

@menu
* msgfmt Invocation::           Invoking the @code{msgfmt} Program
* msgunfmt Invocation::         Invoking the @code{msgunfmt} Program
* MO Files::                    The Format of GNU MO Files
@end menu

@node msgfmt Invocation, msgunfmt Invocation, Binaries, Binaries
@section Invoking the @code{msgfmt} Program

@include msgfmt.texi

@node msgunfmt Invocation, MO Files, msgfmt Invocation, Binaries
@section Invoking the @code{msgunfmt} Program

@include msgunfmt.texi

@node MO Files,  , msgunfmt Invocation, Binaries
@section The Format of GNU MO Files
@cindex MO file's format
@cindex file format, @file{.mo}

The format of the generated MO files is best described by a picture,
which appears below.

@cindex magic signature of MO files
The first two words serve the identification of the file.  The magic
number will always signal GNU MO files.  The number is stored in the
byte order of the generating machine, so the magic number really is
two numbers: @code{0x950412de} and @code{0xde120495}.  The second
word describes the current revision of the file format.  For now the
revision is 0.  This might change in future versions, and ensures
that the readers of MO files can distinguish new formats from old
ones, so that both can be handled correctly.  The version is kept
separate from the magic number, instead of using different magic
numbers for different formats, mainly because @file{/etc/magic} is
not updated often.  It might be better to have magic separated from
internal format version identification.

Follow a number of pointers to later tables in the file, allowing
for the extension of the prefix part of MO files without having to
recompile programs reading them.  This might become useful for later
inserting a few flag bits, indication about the charset used, new
tables, or other things.

Then, at offset @var{O} and offset @var{T} in the picture, two tables
of string descriptors can be found.  In both tables, each string
descriptor uses two 32 bits integers, one for the string length,
another for the offset of the string in the MO file, counting in bytes
from the start of the file.  The first table contains descriptors
for the original strings, and is sorted so the original strings
are in increasing lexicographical order.  The second table contains
descriptors for the translated strings, and is parallel to the first
table: to find the corresponding translation one has to access the
array slot in the second array with the same index.

Having the original strings sorted enables the use of simple binary
search, for when the MO file does not contain an hashing table, or
for when it is not practical to use the hashing table provided in
the MO file.  This also has another advantage, as the empty string
in a PO file GNU @code{gettext} is usually @emph{translated} into
some system information attached to that particular MO file, and the
empty string necessarily becomes the first in both the original and
translated tables, making the system information very easy to find.

@cindex hash table, inside MO files
The size @var{S} of the hash table can be zero.  In this case, the
hash table itself is not contained in the MO file.  Some people might
prefer this because a precomputed hashing table takes disk space, and
does not win @emph{that} much speed.  The hash table contains indices
to the sorted array of strings in the MO file.  Conflict resolution is
done by double hashing.  The precise hashing algorithm used is fairly
dependent on GNU @code{gettext} code, and is not documented here.

As for the strings themselves, they follow the hash file, and each
is terminated with a @key{NUL}, and this @key{NUL} is not counted in
the length which appears in the string descriptor.  The @code{msgfmt}
program has an option selecting the alignment for MO file strings.
With this option, each string is separately aligned so it starts at
an offset which is a multiple of the alignment value.  On some RISC
machines, a correct alignment will speed things up.

@cindex plural forms, in MO files
Plural forms are stored by letting the plural of the original string
follow the singular of the original string, separated through a
@key{NUL} byte.  The length which appears in the string descriptor
includes both.  However, only the singular of the original string
takes part in the hash table lookup.  The plural variants of the
translation are all stored consecutively, separated through a
@key{NUL} byte.  Here also, the length in the string descriptor
includes all of them.

Nothing prevents a MO file from having embedded @key{NUL}s in strings.
However, the program interface currently used already presumes
that strings are @key{NUL} terminated, so embedded @key{NUL}s are
somewhat useless.  But the MO file format is general enough so other
interfaces would be later possible, if for example, we ever want to
implement wide characters right in MO files, where @key{NUL} bytes may
accidently appear.  (No, we don't want to have wide characters in MO
files.  They would make the file unnecessarily large, and the
@samp{wchar_t} type being platform dependent, MO files would be
platform dependent as well.)

This particular issue has been strongly debated in the GNU
@code{gettext} development forum, and it is expectable that MO file
format will evolve or change over time.  It is even possible that many
formats may later be supported concurrently.  But surely, we have to
start somewhere, and the MO file format described here is a good start.
Nothing is cast in concrete, and the format may later evolve fairly
easily, so we should feel comfortable with the current approach.

@example
@group
        byte
             +------------------------------------------+
          0  | magic number = 0x950412de                |
             |                                          |
          4  | file format revision = 0                 |
             |                                          |
          8  | number of strings                        |  == N
             |                                          |
         12  | offset of table with original strings    |  == O
             |                                          |
         16  | offset of table with translation strings |  == T
             |                                          |
         20  | size of hashing table                    |  == S
             |                                          |
         24  | offset of hashing table                  |  == H
             |                                          |
             .                                          .
             .    (possibly more entries later)         .
             .                                          .
             |                                          |
          O  | length & offset 0th string  ----------------.
      O + 8  | length & offset 1st string  ------------------.
              ...                                    ...   | |
O + ((N-1)*8)| length & offset (N-1)th string           |  | |
             |                                          |  | |
          T  | length & offset 0th translation  ---------------.
      T + 8  | length & offset 1st translation  -----------------.
              ...                                    ...   | | | |
T + ((N-1)*8)| length & offset (N-1)th translation      |  | | | |
             |                                          |  | | | |
          H  | start hash table                         |  | | | |
              ...                                    ...   | | | |
  H + S * 4  | end hash table                           |  | | | |
             |                                          |  | | | |
             | NUL terminated 0th string  <----------------' | | |
             |                                          |    | | |
             | NUL terminated 1st string  <------------------' | |
             |                                          |      | |
              ...                                    ...       | |
             |                                          |      | |
             | NUL terminated 0th translation  <---------------' |
             |                                          |        |
             | NUL terminated 1st translation  <-----------------'
             |                                          |
              ...                                    ...
             |                                          |
             +------------------------------------------+
@end group
@end example

@node Users, Programmers, Binaries, Top
@chapter The User's View

When GNU @code{gettext} will truly have reached its goal, average users
should feel some kind of astonished pleasure, seeing the effect of
that strange kind of magic that just makes their own native language
appear everywhere on their screens.  As for naive users, they would
ideally have no special pleasure about it, merely taking their own
language for @emph{granted}, and becoming rather unhappy otherwise.

So, let's try to describe here how we would like the magic to operate,
as we want the users' view to be the simplest, among all ways one
could look at GNU @code{gettext}.  All other software engineers:
programmers, translators, maintainers, should work together in such a
way that the magic becomes possible.  This is a long and progressive
undertaking, and information is available about the progress of the
Translation Project.

When a package is distributed, there are two kinds of users:
@dfn{installers} who fetch the distribution, unpack it, configure
it, compile it and install it for themselves or others to use; and
@dfn{end users} that call programs of the package, once these have
been installed at their site.  GNU @code{gettext} is offering magic
for both installers and end users.

@menu
* Matrix::                      The Current @file{ABOUT-NLS} Matrix
* Installers::                  Magic for Installers
* End Users::                   Magic for End Users
@end menu

@node Matrix, Installers, Users, Users
@section The Current @file{ABOUT-NLS} Matrix
@cindex Translation Matrix
@cindex available translations
@cindex @file{ABOUT-NLS} file

Languages are not equally supported in all packages using GNU
@code{gettext}.  To know if some package uses GNU @code{gettext}, one
may check the distribution for the @file{ABOUT-NLS} information file, for
some @file{@var{ll}.po} files, often kept together into some @file{po/}
directory, or for an @file{intl/} directory.  Internationalized packages
have usually many @file{@var{ll}.po} files, where @var{ll} represents
the language.  @ref{End Users} for a complete description of the format
for @var{ll}.

More generally, a matrix is available for showing the current state
of the Translation Project, listing which packages are prepared for
multi-lingual messages, and which languages are supported by each.
Because this information changes often, this matrix is not kept within
this GNU @code{gettext} manual.  This information is often found in
file @file{ABOUT-NLS} from various distributions, but is also as old as
the distribution itself.  A recent copy of this @file{ABOUT-NLS} file,
containing up-to-date information, should generally be found on the
Translation Project sites, and also on most GNU archive sites.

@node Installers, End Users, Matrix, Users
@section Magic for Installers
@cindex package build and installation options
@cindex setting up @code{gettext} at build time

By default, packages fully using GNU @code{gettext}, internally,
are installed in such a way that they to allow translation of
messages.  At @emph{configuration} time, those packages should
automatically detect whether the underlying host system already provides
the GNU @code{gettext} functions.  If not,
the GNU @code{gettext} library should be automatically prepared
and used.  Installers may use special options at configuration
time for changing this behavior.  The command @samp{./configure
--with-included-gettext} bypasses system @code{gettext} to
use the included GNU @code{gettext} instead,
while @samp{./configure --disable-nls}
produces programs totally unable to translate messages.

@vindex LINGUAS@r{, environment variable}
Internationalized packages have usually many @file{@var{ll}.po}
files.  Unless
translations are disabled, all those available are installed together
with the package.  However, the environment variable @code{LINGUAS}
may be set, prior to configuration, to limit the installed set.
@code{LINGUAS} should then contain a space separated list of two-letter
codes, stating which languages are allowed.

@node End Users,  , Installers, Users
@section Magic for End Users
@cindex setting up @code{gettext} at run time
@cindex selecting message language
@cindex language selection

@vindex LANG@r{, environment variable}
We consider here those packages using GNU @code{gettext} internally,
and for which the installers did not disable translation at
@emph{configure} time.  Then, users only have to set the @code{LANG}
environment variable to the appropriate @samp{@var{ll}_@var{CC}}
combination prior to using the programs in the package.  @xref{Matrix}.
For example, let's presume a German site.  At the shell prompt, users
merely have to execute @w{@samp{setenv LANG de_DE}} (in @code{csh}) or
@w{@samp{export LANG; LANG=de_DE}} (in @code{sh}).  They could even do
this from their @file{.login} or @file{.profile} file.

@node Programmers, Translators, Users, Top
@chapter The Programmer's View

@c FIXME: Reorganize whole chapter.

One aim of the current message catalog implementation provided by
GNU @code{gettext} was to use the system's message catalog handling, if the
installer wishes to do so.  So we perhaps should first take a look at
the solutions we know about.  The people in the POSIX committee did not
manage to agree on one of the semi-official standards which we'll
describe below.  In fact they couldn't agree on anything, so they decided
only to include an example of an interface.  The major Unix vendors
are split in the usage of the two most important specifications: X/Open's
catgets vs. Uniforum's gettext interface.  We'll describe them both and
later explain our solution of this dilemma.

@menu
* catgets::                     About @code{catgets}
* gettext::                     About @code{gettext}
* Comparison::                  Comparing the two interfaces
* Using libintl.a::             Using libintl.a in own programs
* gettext grok::                Being a @code{gettext} grok
* Temp Programmers::            Temporary Notes for the Programmers Chapter
@end menu

@node catgets, gettext, Programmers, Programmers
@section About @code{catgets}
@cindex @code{catgets}, X/Open specification

The @code{catgets} implementation is defined in the X/Open Portability
Guide, Volume 3, XSI Supplementary Definitions, Chapter 5.  But the
process of creating this standard seemed to be too slow for some of
the Unix vendors so they created their implementations on preliminary
versions of the standard.  Of course this leads again to problems while
writing platform independent programs: even the usage of @code{catgets}
does not guarantee a unique interface.

Another, personal comment on this that only a bunch of committee members
could have made this interface.  They never really tried to program
using this interface.  It is a fast, memory-saving implementation, an
user can happily live with it.  But programmers hate it (at least I and
some others do@dots{})

But we must not forget one point: after all the trouble with transfering
the rights on Unix(tm) they at last came to X/Open, the very same who
published this specification.  This leads me to making the prediction
that this interface will be in future Unix standards (e.g. Spec1170) and
therefore part of all Unix implementation (implementations, which are
@emph{allowed} to wear this name).

@menu
* Interface to catgets::        The interface
* Problems with catgets::       Problems with the @code{catgets} interface?!
@end menu

@node Interface to catgets, Problems with catgets, catgets, catgets
@subsection The Interface
@cindex interface to @code{catgets}

The interface to the @code{catgets} implementation consists of three
functions which correspond to those used in file access: @code{catopen}
to open the catalog for using, @code{catgets} for accessing the message
tables, and @code{catclose} for closing after work is done.  Prototypes
for the functions and the needed definitions are in the
@code{<nl_types.h>} header file.

@cindex @code{catopen}, a @code{catgets} function
@code{catopen} is used like in this:

@example
nl_catd catd = catopen ("catalog_name", 0);
@end example

The function takes as the argument the name of the catalog.  This usual
refers to the name of the program or the package.  The second parameter
is not further specified in the standard.  I don't even know whether it
is implemented consistently among various systems.  So the common advice
is to use @code{0} as the value.  The return value is a handle to the
message catalog, equivalent to handles to file returned by @code{open}.

@cindex @code{catgets}, a @code{catgets} function
This handle is of course used in the @code{catgets} function which can
be used like this:

@example
char *translation = catgets (catd, set_no, msg_id, "original string");
@end example

The first parameter is this catalog descriptor.  The second parameter
specifies the set of messages in this catalog, in which the message
described by @code{msg_id} is obtained.  @code{catgets} therefore uses a
three-stage addressing:

@display
catalog name @result{} set number @result{} message ID @result{} translation
@end display

@c Anybody else loving Haskell??? :-) -- Uli

The fourth argument is not used to address the translation.  It is given
as a default value in case when one of the addressing stages fail.  One
important thing to remember is that although the return type of catgets
is @code{char *} the resulting string @emph{must not} be changed.  It
should better be @code{const char *}, but the standard is published in
1988, one year before ANSI C.

@noindent
@cindex @code{catclose}, a @code{catgets} function
The last of these function functions is used and behaves as expected:

@example
catclose (catd);
@end example

After this no @code{catgets} call using the descriptor is legal anymore.

@node Problems with catgets,  , Interface to catgets, catgets
@subsection Problems with the @code{catgets} Interface?!
@cindex problems with @code{catgets} interface

Now that this description seemed to be really easy --- where are the
problems we speak of?  In fact the interface could be used in a
reasonable way, but constructing the message catalogs is a pain.  The
reason for this lies in the third argument of @code{catgets}: the unique
message ID.  This has to be a numeric value for all messages in a single
set.  Perhaps you could imagine the problems keeping such a list while
changing the source code.  Add a new message here, remove one there.  Of
course there have been developed a lot of tools helping to organize this
chaos but one as the other fails in one aspect or the other.  We don't
want to say that the other approach has no problems but they are far
more easy to manage.

@node gettext, Comparison, catgets, Programmers
@section About @code{gettext}
@cindex @code{gettext}, a programmer's view

The definition of the @code{gettext} interface comes from a Uniforum
proposal and it is followed by at least one major Unix vendor
(Sun) in its last developments.  It is not specified in any official
standard, though.

The main points about this solution is that it does not follow the
method of normal file handling (open-use-close) and that it does not
burden the programmer so many task, especially the unique key handling.
Of course here also a unique key is needed, but this key is the message
itself (how long or short it is).  See @ref{Comparison} for a more
detailed comparison of the two methods.

The following section contains a rather detailed description of the
interface.  We make it that detailed because this is the interface
we chose for the GNU @code{gettext} Library.  Programmers interested
in using this library will be interested in this description.

@menu
* Interface to gettext::        The interface
* Ambiguities::                 Solving ambiguities
* Locating Catalogs::           Locating message catalog files
* Charset conversion::          How to request conversion to Unicode
* Plural forms::                Additional functions for handling plurals
* GUI program problems::        Another technique for solving ambiguities
* Optimized gettext::           Optimization of the *gettext functions
@end menu

@node Interface to gettext, Ambiguities, gettext, gettext
@subsection The Interface
@cindex @code{gettext} interface

The minimal functionality an interface must have is a) to select a
domain the strings are coming from (a single domain for all programs is
not reasonable because its construction and maintenance is difficult,
perhaps impossible) and b) to access a string in a selected domain.

This is principally the description of the @code{gettext} interface.  It
has a global domain which unqualified usages reference.  Of course this
domain is selectable by the user.

@example
char *textdomain (const char *domain_name);
@end example

This provides the possibility to change or query the current status of
the current global domain of the @code{LC_MESSAGE} category.  The
argument is a null-terminated string, whose characters must be legal in
the use in filenames.  If the @var{domain_name} argument is @code{NULL},
the function returns the current value.  If no value has been set
before, the name of the default domain is returned: @emph{messages}.
Please note that although the return value of @code{textdomain} is of
type @code{char *} no changing is allowed.  It is also important to know
that no checks of the availability are made.  If the name is not
available you will see this by the fact that no translations are provided.

@noindent
To use a domain set by @code{textdomain} the function

@example
char *gettext (const char *msgid);
@end example

@noindent
is to be used.  This is the simplest reasonable form one can imagine.
The translation of the string @var{msgid} is returned if it is available
in the current domain.  If not available the argument itself is
returned.  If the argument is @code{NULL} the result is undefined.

One things which should come into mind is that no explicit dependency to
the used domain is given.  The current value of the domain for the
@code{LC_MESSAGES} locale is used.  If this changes between two
executions of the same @code{gettext} call in the program, both calls
reference a different message catalog.

For the easiest case, which is normally used in internationalized
packages, once at the beginning of execution a call to @code{textdomain}
is issued, setting the domain to a unique name, normally the package
name.  In the following code all strings which have to be translated are
filtered through the gettext function.  That's all, the package speaks
your language.

@node Ambiguities, Locating Catalogs, Interface to gettext, gettext
@subsection Solving Ambiguities
@cindex several domains
@cindex domain ambiguities
@cindex large package

While this single name domain works well for most applications there
might be the need to get translations from more than one domain.  Of
course one could switch between different domains with calls to
@code{textdomain}, but this is really not convenient nor is it fast.  A
possible situation could be one case subject to discussion during this
writing:  all
error messages of functions in the set of common used functions should
go into a separate domain @code{error}.  By this mean we would only need
to translate them once.
Another case are messages from a library, as these @emph{have} to be
independent of the current domain set by the application.

@noindent
For this reasons there are two more functions to retrieve strings:

@example
char *dgettext (const char *domain_name, const char *msgid);
char *dcgettext (const char *domain_name, const char *msgid,
                 int category);
@end example

Both take an additional argument at the first place, which corresponds
to the argument of @code{textdomain}.  The third argument of
@code{dcgettext} allows to use another locale but @code{LC_MESSAGES}.
But I really don't know where this can be useful.  If the
@var{domain_name} is @code{NULL} or @var{category} has an value beside
the known ones, the result is undefined.  It should also be noted that
this function is not part of the second known implementation of this
function family, the one found in Solaris.

A second ambiguity can arise by the fact, that perhaps more than one
domain has the same name.  This can be solved by specifying where the
needed message catalog files can be found.

@example
char *bindtextdomain (const char *domain_name,
                      const char *dir_name);
@end example

Calling this function binds the given domain to a file in the specified
directory (how this file is determined follows below).  Especially a
file in the systems default place is not favored against the specified
file anymore (as it would be by solely using @code{textdomain}).  A
@code{NULL} pointer for the @var{dir_name} parameter returns the binding
associated with @var{domain_name}.  If @var{domain_name} itself is
@code{NULL} nothing happens and a @code{NULL} pointer is returned.  Here
again as for all the other functions is true that none of the return
value must be changed!

It is important to remember that relative path names for the
@var{dir_name} parameter can be trouble.  Since the path is always
computed relative to the current directory different results will be
achieved when the program executes a @code{chdir} command.  Relative
paths should always be avoided to avoid dependencies and
unreliabilities.

@node Locating Catalogs, Charset conversion, Ambiguities, gettext
@subsection Locating Message Catalog Files
@cindex message catalog files location

Because many different languages for many different packages have to be
stored we need some way to add these information to file message catalog
files.  The way usually used in Unix environments is have this encoding
in the file name.  This is also done here.  The directory name given in
@code{bindtextdomain}s second argument (or the default directory),
followed by the value and name of the locale and the domain name are
concatenated:

@example
@var{dir_name}/@var{locale}/LC_@var{category}/@var{domain_name}.mo
@end example

The default value for @var{dir_name} is system specific.  For the GNU
library, and for packages adhering to its conventions, it's:
@example
/usr/local/share/locale
@end example

@noindent
@var{locale} is the value of the locale whose name is this
@code{LC_@var{category}}.  For @code{gettext} and @code{dgettext} this
@code{LC_@var{category}} is always @code{LC_MESSAGES}.@footnote{Some
system, eg Ultrix, don't have @code{LC_MESSAGES}.  Here we use a more or
less arbitrary value for it, namely 1729, the smallest positive integer
which can be represented in two different ways as the sum of two cubes.}
The value of the locale is determined through
@code{setlocale (LC_@var{category}, NULL)}.
@footnote{When the system does not support @code{setlocale} its behavior
in setting the locale values is simulated by looking at the environment
variables.}
@code{dcgettext} specifies the locale category by the third argument.

@node Charset conversion, Plural forms, Locating Catalogs, gettext
@subsection How to specify the output character set @code{gettext} uses
@cindex charset conversion at runtime
@cindex encoding conversion at runtime

@code{gettext} not only looks up a translation in a message catalog.  It
also converts the translation on the fly to the desired output character
set.  This is useful if the user is working in a different character set
than the translator who created the message catalog, because it avoids
distributing variants of message catalogs which differ only in the
character set.

The output character set is, by default, the value of @code{nl_langinfo
(CODESET)}, which depends on the @code{LC_CTYPE} part of the current
locale.  But programs which store strings in a locale independent way
(e.g. UTF-8) can request that @code{gettext} and related functions
return the translations in that encoding, by use of the
@code{bind_textdomain_codeset} function.

Note that the @var{msgid} argument to @code{gettext} is not subject to
character set conversion.  Also, when @code{gettext} does not find a
translation for @var{msgid}, it returns @var{msgid} unchanged --
independently of the current output character set.  It is therefore
recommended that all @var{msgid}s be US-ASCII strings.

@deftypefun {char *} bind_textdomain_codeset (const char *@var{domainname}, const char *@var{codeset})
The @code{bind_textdomain_codeset} function can be used to specify the
output character set for message catalogs for domain @var{domainname}.
The @var{codeset} argument must be a valid codeset name which can be used
for the @code{iconv_open} function, or a null pointer.

If the @var{codeset} parameter is the null pointer,
@code{bind_textdomain_codeset} returns the currently selected codeset
for the domain with the name @var{domainname}. It returns @code{NULL} if
no codeset has yet been selected.

The @code{bind_textdomain_codeset} function can be used several times. 
If used multiple times with the same @var{domainname} argument, the
later call overrides the settings made by the earlier one.

The @code{bind_textdomain_codeset} function returns a pointer to a
string containing the name of the selected codeset.  The string is
allocated internally in the function and must not be changed by the
user.  If the system went out of core during the execution of
@code{bind_textdomain_codeset}, the return value is @code{NULL} and the
global variable @var{errno} is set accordingly.
@end deftypefun

@node Plural forms, GUI program problems, Charset conversion, gettext
@subsection Additional functions for plural forms
@cindex plural forms

The functions of the @code{gettext} family described so far (and all the
@code{catgets} functions as well) have one problem in the real world
which have been neglected completely in all existing approaches.  What
is meant here is the handling of plural forms.

Looking through Unix source code before the time anybody thought about
internationalization (and, sadly, even afterwards) one can often find
code similar to the following:

@smallexample
   printf ("%d file%s deleted", n, n == 1 ? "" : "s");
@end smallexample

@noindent
After the first complaints from people internationalizing the code people
either completely avoided formulations like this or used strings like
@code{"file(s)"}.  Both look unnatural and should be avoided.  First
tries to solve the problem correctly looked like this:

@smallexample
   if (n == 1)
     printf ("%d file deleted", n);
   else
     printf ("%d files deleted", n);
@end smallexample

But this does not solve the problem.  It helps languages where the
plural form of a noun is not simply constructed by adding an `s' but
that is all.  Once again people fell into the trap of believing the
rules their language is using are universal.  But the handling of plural
forms differs widely between the language families.  For example,
Rafal Maszkowski @code{<rzm@@mat.uni.torun.pl>} reports:

@quotation
In Polish we use e.g. plik (file) this way:
@example
1 plik
2,3,4 pliki
5-21 pliko'w
22-24 pliki
25-31 pliko'w
@end example
and so on (o' means 8859-2 oacute which should be rather okreska,
similar to aogonek).
@end quotation

There are two things which can differ between languages (and even inside
language families);

@itemize @bullet
@item
The form how plural forms are built differs.  This is a problem with
languages which have many irregularities.  German, for instance, is a
drastic case.  Though English and German are part of the same language
family (Germanic), the almost regular forming of plural noun forms
(appending an `s') is hardly found in German.

@item
The number of plural forms differ.  This is somewhat surprising for
those who only have experiences with Romanic and Germanic languages
since here the number is the same (there are two).

But other language families have only one form or many forms.  More
information on this in an extra section.
@end itemize

The consequence of this is that application writers should not try to
solve the problem in their code.  This would be localization since it is
only usable for certain, hardcoded language environments.  Instead the
extended @code{gettext} interface should be used.

These extra functions are taking instead of the one key string two
strings and a numerical argument.  The idea behind this is that using
the numerical argument and the first string as a key, the implementation
can select using rules specified by the translator the right plural
form.  The two string arguments then will be used to provide a return
value in case no message catalog is found (similar to the normal
@code{gettext} behavior).  In this case the rules for Germanic language
is used and it is assumed that the first string argument is the singular
form, the second the plural form.

This has the consequence that programs without language catalogs can
display the correct strings only if the program itself is written using
a Germanic language.  This is a limitation but since the GNU C library
(as well as the GNU @code{gettext} package) are written as part of the
GNU package and the coding standards for the GNU project require program
being written in English, this solution nevertheless fulfills its
purpose.

@deftypefun {char *} ngettext (const char *@var{msgid1}, const char *@var{msgid2}, unsigned long int @var{n})
The @code{ngettext} function is similar to the @code{gettext} function
as it finds the message catalogs in the same way.  But it takes two
extra arguments.  The @var{msgid1} parameter must contain the singular
form of the string to be converted.  It is also used as the key for the
search in the catalog.  The @var{msgid2} parameter is the plural form.
The parameter @var{n} is used to determine the plural form.  If no
message catalog is found @var{msgid1} is returned if @code{n == 1},
otherwise @code{msgid2}.

An example for the use of this function is:

@smallexample
printf (ngettext ("%d file removed", "%d files removed", n), n);
@end smallexample

Please note that the numeric value @var{n} has to be passed to the
@code{printf} function as well.  It is not sufficient to pass it only to
@code{ngettext}.
@end deftypefun

@deftypefun {char *} dngettext (const char *@var{domain}, const char *@var{msgid1}, const char *@var{msgid2}, unsigned long int @var{n})
The @code{dngettext} is similar to the @code{dgettext} function in the
way the message catalog is selected.  The difference is that it takes
two extra parameter to provide the correct plural form.  These two
parameters are handled in the same way @code{ngettext} handles them.
@end deftypefun

@deftypefun {char *} dcngettext (const char *@var{domain}, const char *@var{msgid1}, const char *@var{msgid2}, unsigned long int @var{n}, int @var{category})
The @code{dcngettext} is similar to the @code{dcgettext} function in the
way the message catalog is selected.  The difference is that it takes
two extra parameter to provide the correct plural form.  These two
parameters are handled in the same way @code{ngettext} handles them.
@end deftypefun

Now, how do these functions solve the problem of the plural forms?
Without the input of linguists (which was not available) it was not
possible to determine whether there are only a few different forms in
which plural forms are formed or whether the number can increase with
every new supported language.

Therefore the solution implemented is to allow the translator to specify
the rules of how to select the plural form.  Since the formula varies
with every language this is the only viable solution except for
hardcoding the information in the code (which still would require the
possibility of extensions to not prevent the use of new languages).

@cindex specifying plural form in a PO file
@kwindex nplurals@r{, in a PO file header}
@kwindex plural@r{, in a PO file header}
The information about the plural form selection has to be stored in the
header entry of the PO file (the one with the empty @code{msgid} string).
The plural form information looks like this:

@smallexample
Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n == 1 ? 0 : 1;
@end smallexample

The @code{nplurals} value must be a decimal number which specifies how
many different plural forms exist for this language.  The string
following @code{plural} is an expression which is using the C language
syntax.  Exceptions are that no negative numbers are allowed, numbers
must be decimal, and the only variable allowed is @code{n}.  This
expression will be evaluated whenever one of the functions
@code{ngettext}, @code{dngettext}, or @code{dcngettext} is called.  The
numeric value passed to these functions is then substituted for all uses
of the variable @code{n} in the expression.  The resulting value then
must be greater or equal to zero and smaller than the value given as the
value of @code{nplurals}.

@noindent
@cindex plural form formulas
The following rules are known at this point.  The language with families
are listed.  But this does not necessarily mean the information can be
generalized for the whole family (as can be easily seen in the table
below).@footnote{Additions are welcome.  Send appropriate information to
@email{bug-glibc-manual@@gnu.org}.}

@table @asis
@item Only one form:
Some languages only require one single form.  There is no distinction
between the singular and plural form.  An appropriate header entry
would look like this:

@smallexample
Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;
@end smallexample

@noindent
Languages with this property include:

@table @asis
@item Finno-Ugric family
Hungarian
@item Asian family
Japanese, Korean
@item Turkic/Altaic family
Turkish
@end table

@item Two forms, singular used for one only
This is the form used in most existing programs since it is what English
is using.  A header entry would look like this:

@smallexample
Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1;
@end smallexample

(Note: this uses the feature of C expressions that boolean expressions
have to value zero or one.)

@noindent
Languages with this property include:

@table @asis
@item Germanic family
Danish, Dutch, English, German, Norwegian, Swedish
@item Finno-Ugric family
Estonian, Finnish
@item Latin/Greek family
Greek
@item Semitic family
Hebrew
@item Romanic family
Italian, Portuguese, Spanish
@item Artificial
Esperanto
@end table

@item Two forms, singular used for zero and one
Exceptional case in the language family.  The header entry would be:

@smallexample
Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n>1;
@end smallexample

@noindent
Languages with this property include:

@table @asis
@item Romanic family
French, Brazilian Portuguese
@end table

@item Three forms, special case for zero
The header entry would be:

@smallexample
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n != 0 ? 1 : 2;
@end smallexample

@noindent
Languages with this property include:

@table @asis
@item Baltic family
Latvian
@end table

@item Three forms, special cases for one and two
The header entry would be:

@smallexample
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=n==1 ? 0 : n==2 ? 1 : 2;
@end smallexample

@noindent
Languages with this property include:

@table @asis
@item Celtic
Gaeilge (Irish)
@end table

@item Three forms, special case for numbers ending in 1[2-9]
The header entry would look like this:

@smallexample
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; \
    plural=n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : \
           n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2;
@end smallexample

@noindent
Languages with this property include:

@table @asis
@item Baltic family
Lithuanian
@end table

@item Three forms, special cases for numbers ending in 1 and 2, 3, 4, except those ending in 1[1-4]
The header entry would look like this:

@smallexample
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; \
    plural=n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : \
           n%10>=2 && n%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2;
@end smallexample

@noindent
Languages with this property include:

@table @asis
@item Slavic family
Croatian, Czech, Russian, Slovak, Ukrainian
@end table

@item Three forms, special case for one and some numbers ending in 2, 3, or 4
The header entry would look like this:

@smallexample
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; \
    plural=n==1 ? 0 : \
           n%10>=2 && n%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2;
@end smallexample

@noindent
Languages with this property include:

@table @asis
@item Slavic family
Polish
@end table

@item Four forms, special case for one and all numbers ending in 02, 03, or 04
The header entry would look like this:

@smallexample
Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; \
    plural=n%100==1 ? 0 : n%100==2 ? 1 : n%100==3 || n%100==4 ? 2 : 3;
@end smallexample

@noindent
Languages with this property include:

@table @asis
@item Slavic family
Slovenian
@end table
@end table

@node GUI program problems, Optimized gettext, Plural forms, gettext
@subsection How to use @code{gettext} in GUI programs
@cindex GUI programs
@cindex translating menu entries
@cindex menu entries

One place where the @code{gettext} functions, if used normally, have big
problems is within programs with graphical user interfaces (GUIs).  The
problem is that many of the strings which have to be translated are very
short.  They have to appear in pull-down menus which restricts the
length.  But strings which are not containing entire sentences or at
least large fragments of a sentence may appear in more than one
situation in the program but might have different translations.  This is
especially true for the one-word strings which are frequently used in
GUI programs.

As a consequence many people say that the @code{gettext} approach is
wrong and instead @code{catgets} should be used which indeed does not
have this problem.  But there is a very simple and powerful method to
handle these kind of problems with the @code{gettext} functions.

@noindent
As as example consider the following fictional situation.  A GUI program
has a menu bar with the following entries:

@smallexample
+------------+------------+--------------------------------------+
| File       | Printer    |                                      |
+------------+------------+--------------------------------------+
| Open     | | Select   |
| New      | | Open     |
+----------+ | Connect  |
             +----------+
@end smallexample

To have the strings @code{File}, @code{Printer}, @code{Open},
@code{New}, @code{Select}, and @code{Connect} translated there has to be
at some point in the code a call to a function of the @code{gettext}
family.  But in two places the string passed into the function would be
@code{Open}.  The translations might not be the same and therefore we
are in the dilemma described above.

One solution to this problem is to artificially enlengthen the strings
to make them unambiguous.  But what would the program do if no
translation is available?  The enlengthened string is not what should be
printed.  So we should use a little bit modified version of the functions.

To enlengthen the strings a uniform method should be used.  E.g., in the
example above the strings could be chosen as

@smallexample
Menu|File
Menu|Printer
Menu|File|Open
Menu|File|New
Menu|Printer|Select
Menu|Printer|Open
Menu|Printer|Connect
@end smallexample

Now all the strings are different and if now instead of @code{gettext}
the following little wrapper function is used, everything works just
fine:

@cindex sgettext
@smallexample
  char *
  sgettext (const char *msgid)
  @{
    char *msgval = gettext (msgid);
    if (msgval == msgid)
      msgval = strrchr (msgid, '|') + 1;
    return msgval;
  @}
@end smallexample

What this little function does is to recognize the case when no
translation is available.  This can be done very efficiently by a
pointer comparison since the return value is the input value.  If there
is no translation we know that the input string is in the format we used
for the Menu entries and therefore contains a @code{|} character.  We
simply search for the last occurrence of this character and return a
pointer to the character following it.  That's it!

If one now consistently uses the enlengthened string form and replaces
the @code{gettext} calls with calls to @code{sgettext} (this is normally
limited to very few places in the GUI implementation) then it is
possible to produce a program which can be internationalized.

The other @code{gettext} functions (@code{dgettext}, @code{dcgettext}
and the @code{ngettext} equivalents) can and should have corresponding
functions as well which look almost identical, except for the parameters
and the call to the underlying function.

Now there is of course the question why such functions do not exist in
the GNU gettext package?  There are two parts of the answer to this question.

@itemize @bullet
@item
They are easy to write and therefore can be provided by the project they
are used in.  This is not an answer by itself and must be seen together
with the second part which is:

@item
There is no way the gettext package can contain a version which can work
everywhere.  The problem is the selection of the character to separate
the prefix from the actual string in the enlenghtened string.  The
examples above used @code{|} which is a quite good choice because it
resembles a notation frequently used in this context and it also is a
character not often used in message strings.

But what if the character is used in message strings?  Or if the chose
character is not available in the character set on the machine one
compiles (e.g., @code{|} is not required to exist for @w{ISO C}; this is
why the @file{iso646.h} file exists in @w{ISO C} programming environments).
@end itemize

There is only one more comment to be said.  The wrapper function above
requires that the translations strings are not enlengthened themselves.
This is only logical.  There is no need to disambiguate the strings
(since they are never used as keys for a search) and one also saves
quite some memory and disk space by doing this.

@node Optimized gettext,  , GUI program problems, gettext
@subsection Optimization of the *gettext functions
@cindex optimization of @code{gettext} functions

At this point of the discussion we should talk about an advantage of the
GNU @code{gettext} implementation.  Some readers might have pointed out
that an internationalized program might have a poor performance if some
string has to be translated in an inner loop.  While this is unavoidable
when the string varies from one run of the loop to the other it is
simply a waste of time when the string is always the same.  Take the
following example:

@example
@group
@{
  while (@dots{})
    @{
      puts (gettext ("Hello world"));
    @}
@}
@end group
@end example

@noindent
When the locale selection does not change between two runs the resulting
string is always the same.  One way to use this is:

@example
@group
@{
  str = gettext ("Hello world");
  while (@dots{})
    @{
      puts (str);
    @}
@}
@end group
@end example

@noindent
But this solution is not usable in all situation (e.g. when the locale
selection changes) nor does it lead to legible code.

For this reason, GNU @code{gettext} caches previous translation results.
When the same translation is requested twice, with no new message
catalogs being loaded in between, @code{gettext} will, the second time,
find the result through a single cache lookup.

@node Comparison, Using libintl.a, gettext, Programmers
@section Comparing the Two Interfaces
@cindex @code{gettext} vs @code{catgets}
@cindex comparison of interfaces

@c FIXME: arguments to catgets vs. gettext
@c Partly done 950718 -- drepper

The following discussion is perhaps a little bit colored.  As said
above we implemented GNU @code{gettext} following the Uniforum
proposal and this surely has its reasons.  But it should show how we
came to this decision.

First we take a look at the developing process.  When we write an
application using NLS provided by @code{gettext} we proceed as always.
Only when we come to a string which might be seen by the users and thus
has to be translated we use @code{gettext("@dots{}")} instead of
@code{"@dots{}"}.  At the beginning of each source file (or in a central
header file) we define

@example
#define gettext(String) (String)
@end example

Even this definition can be avoided when the system supports the
@code{gettext} function in its C library.  When we compile this code the
result is the same as if no NLS code is used.  When  you take a look at
the GNU @code{gettext} code you will see that we use @code{_("@dots{}")}
instead of @code{gettext("@dots{}")}.  This reduces the number of
additional characters per translatable string to @emph{3} (in words:
three).

When now a production version of the program is needed we simply replace
the definition

@example
#define _(String) (String)
@end example

@noindent
by

@cindex include file @file{libintl.h}
@example
#include <libintl.h>
#define _(String) gettext (String)
@end example

@noindent
Additionally we run the program @file{xgettext} on all source code file
which contain translatable strings and that's it: we have a running
program which does not depend on translations to be available, but which
can use any that becomes available.

@cindex @code{N_}, a convenience macro
The same procedure can be done for the @code{gettext_noop} invocations
(@pxref{Special cases}).  One usually defines @code{gettext_noop} as a
no-op macro.  So you should consider the following code for your project:

@example
#define gettext_noop(String) String
#define N_(String) gettext_noop (String)
@end example

@code{N_} is a short form similar to @code{_}.  The @file{Makefile} in
the @file{po/} directory of GNU @code{gettext} knows by default both of the
mentioned short forms so you are invited to follow this proposal for
your own ease.

Now to @code{catgets}.  The main problem is the work for the
programmer.  Every time he comes to a translatable string he has to
define a number (or a symbolic constant) which has also be defined in
the message catalog file.  He also has to take care for duplicate
entries, duplicate message IDs etc.  If he wants to have the same
quality in the message catalog as the GNU @code{gettext} program
provides he also has to put the descriptive comments for the strings and
the location in all source code files in the message catalog.  This is
nearly a Mission: Impossible.

But there are also some points people might call advantages speaking for
@code{catgets}.  If you have a single word in a string and this string
is used in different contexts it is likely that in one or the other
language the word has different translations.  Example:

@example
printf ("%s: %d", gettext ("number"), number_of_errors)

printf ("you should see %d %s", number_count,
        number_count == 1 ? gettext ("number") : gettext ("numbers"))
@end example

Here we have to translate two times the string @code{"number"}.  Even
if you do not speak a language beside English it might be possible to
recognize that the two words have a different meaning.  In German the
first appearance has to be translated to @code{"Anzahl"} and the second
to @code{"Zahl"}.

Now you can say that this example is really esoteric.  And you are
right!  This is exactly how we felt about this problem and decide that
it does not weight that much.  The solution for the above problem could
be very easy:

@example
printf ("%s %d", gettext ("number:"), number_of_errors)

printf (number_count == 1 ? gettext ("you should see %d number")
                          : gettext ("you should see %d numbers"),
        number_count)
@end example

We believe that we can solve all conflicts with this method.  If it is
difficult one can also consider changing one of the conflicting string a
little bit.  But it is not impossible to overcome.

@code{catgets} allows same original entry to have different translations,
but @code{gettext} has another, scalable approach for solving ambiguities
of this kind: @xref{Ambiguities}.

@node Using libintl.a, gettext grok, Comparison, Programmers
@section Using libintl.a in own programs

Starting with version 0.9.4 the library @code{libintl.h} should be
self-contained.  I.e., you can use it in your own programs without
providing additional functions.  The @file{Makefile} will put the header
and the library in directories selected using the @code{$(prefix)}.

@node gettext grok, Temp Programmers, Using libintl.a, Programmers
@section Being a @code{gettext} grok

To fully exploit the functionality of the GNU @code{gettext} library it
is surely helpful to read the source code.  But for those who don't want
to spend that much time in reading the (sometimes complicated) code here
is a list comments:

@itemize @bullet
@item Changing the language at runtime
@cindex language selection at runtime

For interactive programs it might be useful to offer a selection of the
used language at runtime.  To understand how to do this one need to know
how the used language is determined while executing the @code{gettext}
function.  The method which is presented here only works correctly
with the GNU implementation of the @code{gettext} functions.

In the function @code{dcgettext} at every call the current setting of
the highest priority environment variable is determined and used.
Highest priority means here the following list with decreasing
priority:

@enumerate
@vindex LANGUAGE@r{, environment variable}
@item @code{LANGUAGE}
@vindex LC_ALL@r{, environment variable}
@item @code{LC_ALL}
@vindex LC_CTYPE@r{, environment variable}
@vindex LC_NUMERIC@r{, environment variable}
@vindex LC_TIME@r{, environment variable}
@vindex LC_COLLATE@r{, environment variable}
@vindex LC_MONETARY@r{, environment variable}
@vindex LC_MESSAGES@r{, environment variable}
@item @code{LC_xxx}, according to selected locale
@vindex LANG@r{, environment variable}
@item @code{LANG}
@end enumerate

Afterwards the path is constructed using the found value and the
translation file is loaded if available.

What is now when the value for, say, @code{LANGUAGE} changes.  According
to the process explained above the new value of this variable is found
as soon as the @code{dcgettext} function is called.  But this also means
the (perhaps) different message catalog file is loaded.  In other
words: the used language is changed.

But there is one little hook.  The code for gcc-2.7.0 and up provides
some optimization.  This optimization normally prevents the calling of
the @code{dcgettext} function as long as no new catalog is loaded.  But
if @code{dcgettext} is not called the program also cannot find the
@code{LANGUAGE} variable be changed (@pxref{Optimized gettext}).  A
solution for this is very easy.  Include the following code in the
language switching function.

@example
  /* Change language.  */
  setenv ("LANGUAGE", "fr", 1);

  /* Make change known.  */
  @{
    extern int  _nl_msg_cat_cntr;
    ++_nl_msg_cat_cntr;
  @}
@end example

@cindex @code{_nl_msg_cat_cntr}
The variable @code{_nl_msg_cat_cntr} is defined in @file{loadmsgcat.c}.
You don't need to know what this is for. But it can be used to detect
whether a @code{gettext} implementation is GNU gettext and not non-GNU
system's native gettext implementation.

@end itemize

@node Temp Programmers,  , gettext grok, Programmers
@section Temporary Notes for the Programmers Chapter

@menu
* Temp Implementations::        Temporary - Two Possible Implementations
* Temp catgets::                Temporary - About @code{catgets}
* Temp WSI::                    Temporary - Why a single implementation
* Temp Notes::                  Temporary - Notes
@end menu

@node Temp Implementations, Temp catgets, Temp Programmers, Temp Programmers
@subsection Temporary - Two Possible Implementations

There are two competing methods for language independent messages:
the X/Open @code{catgets} method, and the Uniforum @code{gettext}
method.  The @code{catgets} method indexes messages by integers; the
@code{gettext} method indexes them by their English translations.
The @code{catgets} method has been around longer and is supported
by more vendors.  The @code{gettext} method is supported by Sun,
and it has been heard that the COSE multi-vendor initiative is
supporting it.  Neither method is a POSIX standard; the POSIX.1
committee had a lot of disagreement in this area.

Neither one is in the POSIX standard.  There was much disagreement
in the POSIX.1 committee about using the @code{gettext} routines
vs. @code{catgets} (XPG).  In the end the committee couldn't
agree on anything, so no messaging system was included as part
of the standard.  I believe the informative annex of the standard
includes the XPG3 messaging interfaces, ``@dots{}as an example of
a messaging system that has been implemented@dots{}''

They were very careful not to say anywhere that you should use one
set of interfaces over the other.  For more on this topic please
see the Programming for Internationalization FAQ.

@node Temp catgets, Temp WSI, Temp Implementations, Temp Programmers
@subsection Temporary - About @code{catgets}

There have been a few discussions of late on the use of
@code{catgets} as a base.  I think it important to present both
sides of the argument and hence am opting to play devil's advocate
for a little bit.

I'll not deny the fact that @code{catgets} could have been designed
a lot better.  It currently has quite a number of limitations and
these have already been pointed out.

However there is a great deal to be said for consistency and
standardization.  A common recurring problem when writing Unix
software is the myriad portability problems across Unix platforms.
It seems as if every Unix vendor had a look at the operating system
and found parts they could improve upon.  Undoubtedly, these
modifications are probably innovative and solve real problems.
However, software developers have a hard time keeping up with all
these changes across so many platforms.

And this has prompted the Unix vendors to begin to standardize their
systems.  Hence the impetus for Spec1170.  Every major Unix vendor
has committed to supporting this standard and every Unix software
developer waits with glee the day they can write software to this
standard and simply recompile (without having to use autoconf)
across different platforms.

As I understand it, Spec1170 is roughly based upon version 4 of the
X/Open Portability Guidelines (XPG4).  Because @code{catgets} and
friends are defined in XPG4, I'm led to believe that @code{catgets}
is a part of Spec1170 and hence will become a standardized component
of all Unix systems.

@node Temp WSI, Temp Notes, Temp catgets, Temp Programmers
@subsection Temporary - Why a single implementation

Now it seems kind of wasteful to me to have two different systems
installed for accessing message catalogs.  If we do want to remedy
@code{catgets} deficiencies why don't we try to expand @code{catgets}
(in a compatible manner) rather than implement an entirely new system.
Otherwise, we'll end up with two message catalog access systems installed
with an operating system - one set of routines for packages using GNU
@code{gettext} for their internationalization, and another set of routines
(catgets) for all other software.  Bloated?

Supposing another catalog access system is implemented.  Which do
we recommend?  At least for Linux, we need to attract as many
software developers as possible.  Hence we need to make it as easy
for them to port their software as possible.  Which means supporting
@code{catgets}.  We will be implementing the @code{libintl} code
within our @code{libc}, but does this mean we also have to incorporate
another message catalog access scheme within our @code{libc} as well?
And what about people who are going to be using the @code{libintl}
+ non-@code{catgets} routines.  When they port their software to
other platforms, they're now going to have to include the front-end
(@code{libintl}) code plus the back-end code (the non-@code{catgets}
access routines) with their software instead of just including the
@code{libintl} code with their software.

Message catalog support is however only the tip of the iceberg.
What about the data for the other locale categories.  They also have
a number of deficiencies.  Are we going to abandon them as well and
develop another duplicate set of routines (should @code{libintl}
expand beyond message catalog support)?

Like many parts of Unix that can be improved upon, we're stuck with balancing
compatibility with the past with useful improvements and innovations for
the future.

@node Temp Notes,  , Temp WSI, Temp Programmers
@subsection Temporary - Notes

X/Open agreed very late on the standard form so that many
implementations differ from the final form.  Both of my system (old
Linux catgets and Ultrix-4) have a strange variation.

OK.  After incorporating the last changes I have to spend some time on
making the GNU/Linux @code{libc} @code{gettext} functions.  So in future
Solaris is not the only system having @code{gettext}.

@node Translators, Maintainers, Programmers, Top
@chapter The Translator's View

@c FIXME: Reorganize whole chapter.

@menu
* Trans Intro 0::               Introduction 0
* Trans Intro 1::               Introduction 1
* Discussions::                 Discussions
* Organization::                Organization
* Information Flow::            Information Flow
@end menu

@node Trans Intro 0, Trans Intro 1, Translators, Translators
@section Introduction 0

Free software is going international!  The Translation Project is a way
to get maintainers, translators and users all together, so free software
will gradually become able to speak many native languages.

The GNU @code{gettext} tool set contains @emph{everything} maintainers
need for internationalizing their packages for messages.  It also
contains quite useful tools for helping translators at localizing
messages to their native language, once a package has already been
internationalized.

To achieve the Translation Project, we need many interested
people who like their own language and write it well, and who are also
able to synergize with other translators speaking the same language.
If you'd like to volunteer to @emph{work} at translating messages,
please send mail to your translating team.

Each team has its own mailing list, courtesy of Linux
International.  You may reach your translating team at the address
@file{@var{ll}@@li.org}, replacing @var{ll} by the two-letter @w{ISO 639}
code for your language.  Language codes are @emph{not} the same as
country codes given in @w{ISO 3166}.  The following translating teams
exist:

@quotation
Chinese @code{zh}, Czech @code{cs}, Danish @code{da}, Dutch @code{nl},
Esperanto @code{eo}, Finnish @code{fi}, French @code{fr}, Irish
@code{ga}, German @code{de}, Greek @code{el}, Italian @code{it},
Japanese @code{ja}, Indonesian @code{in}, Norwegian @code{no}, Polish
@code{pl}, Portuguese @code{pt}, Russian @code{ru}, Spanish @code{es},
Swedish @code{sv} and Turkish @code{tr}.
@end quotation

@noindent
For example, you may reach the Chinese translating team by writing to
@file{zh@@li.org}.  When you become a member of the translating team
for your own language, you may subscribe to its list.  For example,
Swedish people can send a message to @w{@file{sv-request@@li.org}},
having this message body:

@example
subscribe
@end example

Keep in mind that team members should be interested in @emph{working}
at translations, or at solving translational difficulties, rather than
merely lurking around.  If your team does not exist yet and you want to
start one, please write to @w{@file{translation@@iro.umontreal.ca}};
you will then reach the coordinator for all translator teams.

A handful of GNU packages have already been adapted and provided
with message translations for several languages.  Translation
teams have begun to organize, using these packages as a starting
point.  But there are many more packages and many languages for
which we have no volunteer translators.  If you would like to
volunteer to work at translating messages, please send mail to
@file{translation@@iro.umontreal.ca} indicating what language(s)
you can work on.

@node Trans Intro 1, Discussions, Trans Intro 0, Translators
@section Introduction 1

This is now official, GNU is going international!  Here is the
announcement submitted for the January 1995 GNU Bulletin:

@quotation
A handful of GNU packages have already been adapted and provided
with message translations for several languages.  Translation
teams have begun to organize, using these packages as a starting
point.  But there are many more packages and many languages
for which we have no volunteer translators.  If you'd like to
volunteer to work at translating messages, please send mail to
@samp{translation@@iro.umontreal.ca} indicating what language(s)
you can work on.
@end quotation

This document should answer many questions for those who are curious about
the process or would like to contribute.  Please at least skim over it,
hoping to cut down a little of the high volume of e-mail generated by this
collective effort towards internationalization of free software.

Most free programming which is widely shared is done in English, and
currently, English is used as the main communicating language between
national communities collaborating to free software.  This very document
is written in English.  This will not change in the foreseeable future.

However, there is a strong appetite from national communities for
having more software able to write using national language and habits,
and there is an on-going effort to modify free software in such a way
that it becomes able to do so.  The experiments driven so far raised
an enthusiastic response from pretesters, so we believe that
internationalization of free software is dedicated to succeed.

For suggestion clarifications, additions or corrections to this
document, please e-mail to @file{translation@@iro.umontreal.ca}.

@node Discussions, Organization, Trans Intro 1, Translators
@section Discussions

Facing this internationalization effort, a few users expressed their
concerns.  Some of these doubts are presented and discussed, here.

@itemize @bullet
@item Smaller groups

Some languages are not spoken by a very large number of people, so people
speaking them sometimes consider that there may not be all that much
demand such versions of free software packages.  Moreover, many people
being @emph{into computers}, in some countries, generally seem to prefer
English versions of their software.

On the other end, people might enjoy their own language a lot, and be
very motivated at providing to themselves the pleasure of having their
beloved free software speaking their mother tongue.  They do themselves
a personal favor, and do not pay that much attention to the number of
people beneficiating of their work.

@item Misinterpretation

Other users are shy to push forward their own language, seeing in this
some kind of misplaced propaganda.  Someone thought there must be some
users of the language over the networks pestering other people with it.

But any spoken language is worth localization, because there are
people behind the language for whom the language is important and
dear to their hearts.

@item Odd translations

The biggest problem is to find the right translations so that
everybody can understand the messages.  Translations are usually a
little odd.  Some people get used to English, to the extent they may
find translations into their own language ``rather pushy, obnoxious
and sometimes even hilarious.''  As a French speaking man, I have
the experience of those instruction manuals for goods, so poorly
translated in French in Korea or Taiwan@dots{}

The fact is that we sometimes have to create a kind of national
computer culture, and this is not easy without the collaboration of
many people liking their mother tongue.  This is why translations are
better achieved by people knowing and loving their own language, and
ready to work together at improving the results they obtain.

@item Dependencies over the GPL or LGPL

Some people wonder if using GNU @code{gettext} necessarily brings their
package under the protective wing of the GNU General Public License or
the GNU Library General Public License, when they do not want to make
their program free, or want other kinds of freedom.  The simplest
answer is ``normally not''.

The GNU @code{gettext} library, i.e. the contents of @code{libintl},
is covered by the GNU Library General Public License.  The rest of
the GNU @code{gettext} package is covered by the GNU General Public
License.

The mere marking of localizable strings in a package, or conditional
inclusion of a few lines for initialization, is not really including
GPL'ed or LGPL'ed code.  However, since the localization routines in
@code{libintl} are under the LGPL, the LGPL needs to be considered.
It gives the right to distribute the complete unmodified source of
@code{libintl} even with non-free programs.  It also gives the right
to use @code{libintl} as a shared library, even for non-free programs.
But it gives the right to use @code{libintl} as a static library or
to incorporate @code{libintl} into another library only to free
software.

@end itemize

@node Organization, Information Flow, Discussions, Translators
@section Organization

On a larger scale, the true solution would be to organize some kind of
fairly precise set up in which volunteers could participate.  I gave
some thought to this idea lately, and realize there will be some
touchy points.  I thought of writing to Richard Stallman to launch
such a project, but feel it might be good to shake out the ideas
between ourselves first.  Most probably that Linux International has
some experience in the field already, or would like to orchestrate
the volunteer work, maybe.  Food for thought, in any case!

I guess we have to setup something early, somehow, that will help
many possible contributors of the same language to interlock and avoid
work duplication, and further be put in contact for solving together
problems particular to their tongue (in most languages, there are many
difficulties peculiar to translating technical English).  My Swedish
contributor acknowledged these difficulties, and I'm well aware of
them for French.

This is surely not a technical issue, but we should manage so the
effort of locale contributors be maximally useful, despite the national
team layer interface between contributors and maintainers.

The Translation Project needs some setup for coordinating language
coordinators.  Localizing evolving programs will surely
become a permanent and continuous activity in the free software community,
once well started.
The setup should be minimally completed and tested before GNU
@code{gettext} becomes an official reality.  The e-mail address
@file{translation@@iro.umontreal.ca} has been setup for receiving
offers from volunteers and general e-mail on these topics.  This address
reaches the Translation Project coordinator.

@menu
* Central Coordination::        Central Coordination
* National Teams::              National Teams
* Mailing Lists::               Mailing Lists
@end menu

@node Central Coordination, National Teams, Organization, Organization
@subsection Central Coordination

I also think GNU will need sooner than it thinks, that someone setup
a way to organize and coordinate these groups.  Some kind of group
of groups.  My opinion is that it would be good that GNU delegates
this task to a small group of collaborating volunteers, shortly.
Perhaps in @file{gnu.announce} a list of this national committee's
can be published.

My role as coordinator would simply be to refer to Ulrich any German
speaking volunteer interested to localization of free software packages, and
maybe helping national groups to initially organize, while maintaining
national registries for until national groups are ready to take over.
In fact, the coordinator should ease volunteers to get in contact with
one another for creating national teams, which should then select
one coordinator per language, or country (regionalized language).
If well done, the coordination should be useful without being an
overwhelming task, the time to put delegations in place.

@node National Teams, Mailing Lists, Central Coordination, Organization
@subsection National Teams

I suggest we look for volunteer coordinators/editors for individual
languages.  These people will scan contributions of translation files
for various programs, for their own languages, and will ensure high
and uniform standards of diction.

From my current experience with other people in these days, those who
provide localizations are very enthusiastic about the process, and are
more interested in the localization process than in the program they
localize, and want to do many programs, not just one.  This seems
to confirm that having a coordinator/editor for each language is a
good idea.

We need to choose someone who is good at writing clear and concise
prose in the language in question.  That is hard---we can't check
it ourselves.  So we need to ask a few people to judge each others'
writing and select the one who is best.

I announce my prerelease to a few dozen people, and you would not
believe all the discussions it generated already.  I shudder to think
what will happen when this will be launched, for true, officially,
world wide.  Who am I to arbitrate between two Czekolsovak users
contradicting each other, for example?

I assume that your German is not much better than my French so that
I would not be able to judge about these formulations.  What I would
suggest is that for each language there is a group for people who
maintain the PO files and judge about changes.  I suspect there will
be cultural differences between how such groups of people will behave.
Some will have relaxed ways, reach consensus easily, and have anyone
of the group relate to the maintainers, while others will fight to
death, organize heavy administrations up to national standards, and
use strict channels.

The German team is putting out a good example.  Right now, they are
maybe half a dozen people revising translations of each other and
discussing the linguistic issues.  I do not even have all the names.
Ulrich Drepper is taking care of coordinating the German team.
He subscribed to all my pretest lists, so I do not even have to warn
him specifically of incoming releases.

I'm sure, that is a good idea to get teams for each language working
on translations. That will make the translations better and more
consistent.

@menu
* Sub-Cultures::                Sub-Cultures
* Organizational Ideas::        Organizational Ideas
@end menu

@node Sub-Cultures, Organizational Ideas, National Teams, National Teams
@subsubsection Sub-Cultures

Taking French for example, there are a few sub-cultures around computers
which developed diverging vocabularies.  Picking volunteers here and
there without addressing this problem in an organized way, soon in the
project, might produce a distasteful mix of internationalized programs,
and possibly trigger endless quarrels among those who really care.

Keeping some kind of unity in the way French localization of
internationalized programs is achieved is a difficult (and delicate) job.
Knowing the latin character of French people (:-), if we take this
the wrong way, we could end up nowhere, or spoil a lot of energies.
Maybe we should begin to address this problem seriously @emph{before}
GNU @code{gettext} become officially published.  And I suspect that this
means soon!

@node Organizational Ideas,  , Sub-Cultures, National Teams
@subsubsection Organizational Ideas

I expect the next big changes after the official release.  Please note
that I use the German translation of the short GPL message.  We need
to set a few good examples before the localization goes out for true
in the free software community.  Here are a few points to discuss:

@itemize @bullet
@item
Each group should have one FTP server (at least one master).

@item
The files on the server should reflect the latest version (of
course!) and it should also contain a RCS directory with the
corresponding archives (I don't have this now).

@item
There should also be a ChangeLog file (this is more useful than the
RCS archive but can be generated automatically from the later by
Emacs).

@item
A @dfn{core group} should judge about questionable changes (for now
this group consists solely by me but I ask some others occasionally;
this also seems to work).

@end itemize

@node Mailing Lists,  , National Teams, Organization
@subsection Mailing Lists

If we get any inquiries about GNU @code{gettext}, send them on to:

@example
@file{translation@@iro.umontreal.ca}
@end example

The @file{*-pretest} lists are quite useful to me, maybe the idea could
be generalized to many GNU, and non-GNU packages.  But each maintainer
his/her way!

Fran@,{c}ois, we have a mechanism in place here at
@file{gnu.ai.mit.edu} to track teams, support mailing lists for
them and log members.  We have a slight preference that you use it.
If this is OK with you, I can get you clued in.

Things are changing!  A few years ago, when Daniel Fekete and I
asked for a mailing list for GNU localization, nested at the FSF, we
were politely invited to organize it anywhere else, and so did we.
For communicating with my pretesters, I later made a handful of
mailing lists located at iro.umontreal.ca and administrated by
@code{majordomo}.  These lists have been @emph{very} dependable
so far@dots{}

I suspect that the German team will organize itself a mailing list
located in Germany, and so forth for other countries.  But before they
organize for true, it could surely be useful to offer mailing lists
located at the FSF to each national team.  So yes, please explain me
how I should proceed to create and handle them.

We should create temporary mailing lists, one per country, to help
people organize.  Temporary, because once regrouped and structured, it
would be fair the volunteers from country bring back @emph{their} list
in there and manage it as they want.  My feeling is that, in the long
run, each team should run its own list, from within their country.
There also should be some central list to which all teams could
subscribe as they see fit, as long as each team is represented in it.

@node Information Flow,  , Organization, Translators
@section Information Flow

There will surely be some discussion about this messages after the
packages are finally released.  If people now send you some proposals
for better messages, how do you proceed?  Jim, please note that
right now, as I put forward nearly a dozen of localizable programs, I
receive both the translations and the coordination concerns about them.

If I put one of my things to pretest, Ulrich receives the announcement
and passes it on to the German team, who make last minute revisions.
Then he submits the translation files to me @emph{as the maintainer}.
For free packages I do not maintain, I would not even hear about it.
This scheme could be made to work for the whole Translation Project,
I think.  For security reasons, maybe Ulrich (national coordinators,
in fact) should update central registry kept at the Translation Project
(Jim, me, or Len's recruits) once in a while.

In December/January, I was aggressively ready to internationalize
all of GNU, giving myself the duty of one small GNU package per week
or so, taking many weeks or months for bigger packages.  But it does
not work this way.  I first did all the things I'm responsible for.
I've nothing against some missionary work on other maintainers, but
I'm also loosing a lot of energy over it---same debates over again.

And when the first localized packages are released we'll get a lot of
responses about ugly translations :-).  Surely, and we need to have
beforehand a fairly good idea about how to handle the information
flow between the national teams and the package maintainers.

Please start saving somewhere a quick history of each PO file.  I know
for sure that the file format will change, allowing for comments.
It would be nice that each file has a kind of log, and references for
those who want to submit comments or gripes, or otherwise contribute.
I sent a proposal for a fast and flexible format, but it is not
receiving acceptance yet by the GNU deciders.  I'll tell you when I
have more information about this.

@node Maintainers, Programming Languages, Translators, Top
@chapter The Maintainer's View
@cindex package maintainer's view of @code{gettext}

The maintainer of a package has many responsibilities.  One of them
is ensuring that the package will install easily on many platforms,
and that the magic we described earlier (@pxref{Users}) will work
for installers and end users.

Of course, there are many possible ways by which GNU @code{gettext}
might be integrated in a distribution, and this chapter does not cover
them in all generality.  Instead, it details one possible approach which
is especially adequate for many free software distributions following GNU
standards, or even better, Gnits standards, because GNU @code{gettext}
is purposely for helping the internationalization of the whole GNU
project, and as many other good free packages as possible.  So, the
maintainer's view presented here presumes that the package already has
a @file{configure.in} file and uses GNU Autoconf.

Nevertheless, GNU @code{gettext} may surely be useful for free packages
not following GNU standards and conventions, but the maintainers of such
packages might have to show imagination and initiative in organizing
their distributions so @code{gettext} work for them in all situations.
There are surely many, out there.

Even if @code{gettext} methods are now stabilizing, slight adjustments
might be needed between successive @code{gettext} versions, so you
should ideally revise this chapter in subsequent releases, looking
for changes.

@menu
* Flat and Non-Flat::           Flat or Non-Flat Directory Structures
* Prerequisites::               Prerequisite Works
* gettextize Invocation::       Invoking the @code{gettextize} Program
* Adjusting Files::             Files You Must Create or Alter
* autoconf macros::             Autoconf macros for use in @file{configure.in}
@end menu

@node Flat and Non-Flat, Prerequisites, Maintainers, Maintainers
@section Flat or Non-Flat Directory Structures

Some free software packages are distributed as @code{tar} files which unpack
in a single directory, these are said to be @dfn{flat} distributions.
Other free software packages have a one level hierarchy of subdirectories, using
for example a subdirectory named @file{doc/} for the Texinfo manual and
man pages, another called @file{lib/} for holding functions meant to
replace or complement C libraries, and a subdirectory @file{src/} for
holding the proper sources for the package.  These other distributions
are said to be @dfn{non-flat}.

We cannot say much about flat distributions.  A flat
directory structure has the disadvantage of increasing the difficulty
of updating to a new version of GNU @code{gettext}.  Also, if you have
many PO files, this could somewhat pollute your single directory.
Also, GNU @code{gettext}'s libintl sources consist of C sources, shell
scripts, @code{sed} scripts and complicated Makefile rules, which don't
fit well into an existing flat structure.  For these reasons, we
recommend to use non-flat approach in this case as well.

Maybe because GNU @code{gettext} itself has a non-flat structure,
we have more experience with this approach, and this is what will be
described in the remaining of this chapter.  Some maintainers might
use this as an opportunity to unflatten their package structure.

@node Prerequisites, gettextize Invocation, Flat and Non-Flat, Maintainers
@section Prerequisite Works
@cindex converting a package to use @code{gettext}
@cindex migration from earlier versions of @code{gettext}
@cindex upgrading to new versions of @code{gettext}

There are some works which are required for using GNU @code{gettext}
in one of your package.  These works have some kind of generality
that escape the point by point descriptions used in the remainder
of this chapter.  So, we describe them here.

@itemize @bullet
@item
Before attempting to use @code{gettextize} you should install some
other packages first.
Ensure that recent versions of GNU @code{m4}, GNU Autoconf and GNU
@code{gettext} are already installed at your site, and if not, proceed
to do this first.  If you got to install these things, beware that
GNU @code{m4} must be fully installed before GNU Autoconf is even
@emph{configured}.

To further ease the task of a package maintainer the @code{automake}
package was designed and implemented.  GNU @code{gettext} now uses this
tool and the @file{Makefile}s in the @file{intl/} and @file{po/}
therefore know about all the goals necessary for using @code{automake}
and @file{libintl} in one project.

Those four packages are only needed to you, as a maintainer; the
installers of your own package and end users do not really need any of
GNU @code{m4}, GNU Autoconf, GNU @code{gettext}, or GNU @code{automake}
for successfully installing and running your package, with messages
properly translated.  But this is not completely true if you provide
internationalized shell scripts within your own package: GNU
@code{gettext} shall then be installed at the user site if the end users
want to see the translation of shell script messages.

@item
Your package should use Autoconf and have a @file{configure.in} or
@file{configure.ac} file.
If it does not, you have to learn how.  The Autoconf documentation
is quite well written, it is a good idea that you print it and get
familiar with it.

@item
Your C sources should have already been modified according to
instructions given earlier in this manual.  @xref{Sources}.

@item
Your @file{po/} directory should receive all PO files submitted to you
by the translator teams, each having @file{@var{ll}.po} as a name.
This is not usually easy to get translation
work done before your package gets internationalized and available!
Since the cycle has to start somewhere, the easiest for the maintainer
is to start with absolutely no PO files, and wait until various
translator teams get interested in your package, and submit PO files.

@end itemize

It is worth adding here a few words about how the maintainer should
ideally behave with PO files submissions.  As a maintainer, your role is
to authentify the origin of the submission as being the representative
of the appropriate translating teams of the Translation Project (forward
the submission to @file{translation@@iro.umontreal.ca} in case of doubt),
to ensure that the PO file format is not severely broken and does not
prevent successful installation, and for the rest, to merely put these
PO files in @file{po/} for distribution.

As a maintainer, you do not have to take on your shoulders the
responsibility of checking if the translations are adequate or
complete, and should avoid diving into linguistic matters.  Translation
teams drive themselves and are fully responsible of their linguistic
choices for the Translation Project.  Keep in mind that translator teams are @emph{not}
driven by maintainers.  You can help by carefully redirecting all
communications and reports from users about linguistic matters to the
appropriate translation team, or explain users how to reach or join
their team.  The simplest might be to send them the @file{ABOUT-NLS} file.

Maintainers should @emph{never ever} apply PO file bug reports
themselves, short-cutting translation teams.  If some translator has
difficulty to get some of her points through her team, it should not be
an option for her to directly negotiate translations with maintainers.
Teams ought to settle their problems themselves, if any.  If you, as
a maintainer, ever think there is a real problem with a team, please
never try to @emph{solve} a team's problem on your own.

@node gettextize Invocation, Adjusting Files, Prerequisites, Maintainers
@section Invoking the @code{gettextize} Program

Some files are consistently and identically needed in every package
internationalized through GNU @code{gettext}.  As a matter of
convenience, the @code{gettextize} program puts all these files right
in your package.  This program has the following synopsis:

@pindex gettextize
@cindex @code{gettextize} program, usage
@example
gettextize [ @var{option}@dots{} ] [ @var{directory} ]
@end example

@noindent
and accepts the following options:

@table @samp
@item -c
@itemx --copy
@opindex -c@r{, @code{gettextize} option}
@opindex --copy@r{, @code{gettextize} option}
Copy the needed files instead of making symbolic links.  Using links
would allow the package to always use the latest @code{gettext} code
available on the system, but it might disturb some mechanism the
maintainer is used to apply to the sources.  Because running
@code{gettextize} is easy there shouldn't be problems with using copies.

@item -f
@itemx --force
@opindex -f@r{, @code{gettextize} option}
@opindex --force@r{, @code{gettextize} option}
Force replacement of files which already exist.

@item --intl
@opindex --intl@r{, @code{gettextize} option}
Install the libintl sources in a subdirectory named @file{intl/}.
This libintl will be used to provide internationalization on systems
that don't have GNU libintl installed. If this option is omitted,
the call to @code{AM_GNU_GETTEXT} in @file{configure.in} should read:
@samp{AM_GNU_GETTEXT([external])}, and internationalization will not
be enabled on systems lacking GNU gettext.

@item --no-changelog
@opindex --no-changelog@r{, @code{gettextize} option}
Don't update or create ChangeLog files.  By default, @code{gettextize}
logs all changes (file additions, modifications ans removals) in a
file called @samp{ChangeLog} in each affected directory.

@item --help
@opindex --help@r{, @code{gettextize} option}
Display this help and exit.

@item --version
@opindex --version@r{, @code{gettextize} option}
Output version information and exit.

@end table

If @var{directory} is given, this is the top level directory of a
package to prepare for using GNU @code{gettext}.  If not given, it
is assumed that the current directory is the top level directory of
such a package.

The program @code{gettextize} provides the following files.  However,
no existing file will be replaced unless the option @code{--force}
(@code{-f}) is specified.

@enumerate
@item
The @file{ABOUT-NLS} file is copied in the main directory of your package,
the one being at the top level.  This file gives the main indications
about how to install and use the Native Language Support features
of your program.  You might elect to use a more recent copy of this
@file{ABOUT-NLS} file than the one provided through @code{gettextize},
if you have one handy.  You may also fetch a more recent copy of file
@file{ABOUT-NLS} from Translation Project sites, and from most GNU
archive sites.

@item
A @file{po/} directory is created for eventually holding
all translation files, but initially only containing the file
@file{po/Makefile.in.in} from the GNU @code{gettext} distribution.
(beware the double @samp{.in} in the file name) and a few auxiliary
files. If the @file{po/} directory already exists, it will be preserved
along with the files it contains, and only @file{Makefile.in.in} and
the auxiliary files will be overwritten.

@item
Only of @samp{--intl} has been specified:
A @file{intl/} directory is created and filled with most of the files
originally in the @file{intl/} directory of the GNU @code{gettext}
distribution.  Also, if option @code{--force} (@code{-f}) is given,
the @file{intl/} directory is emptied first.

@item
The @file{config.rpath} file is copied into the directory containing
configuration support files. It is needed by the @code{AM_GNU_GETTEXT}
autoconf macro.

@end enumerate

If your site support symbolic links, @code{gettextize} will not
actually copy the files into your package, but establish symbolic
links instead.  This avoids duplicating the disk space needed in
all packages.  Merely using the @samp{-h} option while creating the
@code{tar} archive of your distribution will resolve each link by an
actual copy in the distribution archive.  So, to insist, you really
should use @samp{-h} option with @code{tar} within your @code{dist}
goal of your main @file{Makefile.in}.

It is interesting to understand that most new files for supporting
GNU @code{gettext} facilities in one package go in @file{intl/}
and @file{po/} subdirectories.  One distinction between these two
directories is that @file{intl/} is meant to be completely identical
in all packages using GNU @code{gettext}, while all newly created
files, which have to be different, go into @file{po/}.  There is a
common @file{Makefile.in.in} in @file{po/}, because the @file{po/}
directory needs its own @file{Makefile}, and it has been designed so
it can be identical in all packages.

@node Adjusting Files, autoconf macros, gettextize Invocation, Maintainers
@section Files You Must Create or Alter
@cindex @code{gettext} files

Besides files which are automatically added through @code{gettextize},
there are many files needing revision for properly interacting with
GNU @code{gettext}.  If you are closely following GNU standards for
Makefile engineering and auto-configuration, the adaptations should
be easier to achieve.  Here is a point by point description of the
changes needed in each.

So, here comes a list of files, each one followed by a description of
all alterations it needs.  Many examples are taken out from the GNU
@code{gettext} @value{VERSION} distribution itself, or from the GNU
@code{hello} distribution (@uref{http://www.franken.de/users/gnu/ke/hello}
or @uref{http://www.gnu.franken.de/ke/hello/})  You may indeed
refer to the source code of the GNU @code{gettext} and GNU @code{hello}
packages, as they are intended to be good examples for using GNU
gettext functionality.

@menu
* po/POTFILES.in::              @file{POTFILES.in} in @file{po/}
* po/LINGUAS::                  @file{LINGUAS} in @file{po/}
* po/Makevars::                 @file{Makefile} pieces in @file{po/}
* configure.in::                @file{configure.in} at top level
* config.guess::                @file{config.guess}, @file{config.sub} at top level
* aclocal::                     @file{aclocal.m4} at top level
* acconfig::                    @file{acconfig.h} at top level
* Makefile::                    @file{Makefile.in} at top level
* src/Makefile::                @file{Makefile.in} in @file{src/}
* lib/gettext.h::               @file{gettext.h} in @file{lib/}
@end menu

@node po/POTFILES.in, po/LINGUAS, Adjusting Files, Adjusting Files
@subsection @file{POTFILES.in} in @file{po/}
@cindex @file{POTFILES.in} file

The @file{po/} directory should receive a file named
@file{POTFILES.in}.  This file tells which files, among all program
sources, have marked strings needing translation.  Here is an example
of such a file:

@example
@group
# List of source files containing translatable strings.
# Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

# Common library files
lib/error.c
lib/getopt.c
lib/xmalloc.c

# Package source files
src/gettext.c
src/msgfmt.c
src/xgettext.c
@end group
@end example

@noindent
Hash-marked comments and white lines are ignored.  All other lines
list those source files containing strings marked for translation
(@pxref{Mark Keywords}), in a notation relative to the top level
of your whole distribution, rather than the location of the
@file{POTFILES.in} file itself.

@node po/LINGUAS, po/Makevars, po/POTFILES.in, Adjusting Files
@subsection @file{LINGUAS} in @file{po/}
@cindex @file{LINGUAS} file

The @file{po/} directory should also receive a file named
@file{LINGUAS}.  This file contains the list of available translations.
It is a whitespace separated list.  Hash-marked comments and white lines
are ignored.  Here is an example file:

@example
@group
# Set of available languages.
de fr
@end group
@end example

@noindent
This example means that German and French PO files are available, so
that these languages are currently supported by your package.  If you
want to further restrict, at installation time, the set of installed
languages, this should not be done by modifying the @file{LINGUAS} file,
but rather by using the @code{LINGUAS} environment variable
(@pxref{Installers}).

@node po/Makevars, configure.in, po/LINGUAS, Adjusting Files
@subsection @file{Makefile} pieces in @file{po/}
@cindex @file{Makevars} file

The @file{po/} directory also has a file named @file{Makevars}.
It can be left unmodified if your package has a single message domain
and, accordingly, a single @file{po/} directory. Only packages which
have multiple @file{po/} directories at different locations need to
adjust the three variables defined in @file{Makevars}.

@file{po/Makevars} gets inserted into the @file{po/Makefile} when the
latter is created. At the same time, all files called @file{Rules-*} in the
@file{po/} directory get appended to the @file{po/Makefile}. They present
an opportunity to add rules for special PO files to the Makefile, without
needing to mess with @file{po/Makefile.in.in}.

@cindex quotation marks
@vindex LANGUAGE@r{, environment variable}
GNU gettext comes with a @file{Rules-quot} file, containing rules for
building catalogs @file{en@@quot.po} and @file{en@@boldquot.po}. The
effect of @file{en@@quot.po} is that people who set their @code{LANGUAGE}
environment variable to @samp{en@@quot} will get messages with proper
looking symmetric Unicode quotation marks instead of abusing the ASCII
grave accent and the ASCII apostrophe for indicating quotations. To
enable this catalog, simply add @code{en@@quot} to the @file{po/LINGUAS}
file. The effect of @file{en@@boldquot.po} is that people who set
@code{LANGUAGE} to @samp{en@@boldquot} will get not only proper quotation
marks, but also the quoted text will be shown in a bold font on terminals
and consoles. This catalog is useful only for command-line programs, not
GUI programs. To enable it, similarly add @code{en@@boldquot} to the
@file{po/LINGUAS} file.

@node configure.in, config.guess, po/Makevars, Adjusting Files
@subsection @file{configure.in} at top level

@file{configure.in} or @file{configure.ac} - this is the source from which
@code{autoconf} generates the @file{configure} script.

@enumerate
@item Declare the package and version.
@cindex package and version declaration in @file{configure.in}

This is done by a set of lines like these:

@example
PACKAGE=gettext
VERSION=@value{VERSION}
AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(PACKAGE, "$PACKAGE")
AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(VERSION, "$VERSION")
AC_SUBST(PACKAGE)
AC_SUBST(VERSION)
@end example

@noindent
or, if you are using GNU @code{automake}, by a line like this:

@example
AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(gettext, @value{VERSION})
@end example

@noindent
Of course, you replace @samp{gettext} with the name of your package,
and @samp{@value{VERSION}} by its version numbers, exactly as they
should appear in the packaged @code{tar} file name of your distribution
(@file{gettext-@value{VERSION}.tar.gz}, here).

@item Check for internationalization support.

Here is the main @code{m4} macro for triggering internationalization
support.  Just add this line to @file{configure.in}:

@example
AM_GNU_GETTEXT
@end example

@noindent
This call is purposely simple, even if it generates a lot of configure
time checking and actions.

If you have suppressed the @file{intl/} subdirectory by calling
@code{gettextize} without @samp{--intl} option, this call should read

@example
AM_GNU_GETTEXT([external])
@end example

@item Have output files created.

The @code{AC_OUTPUT} directive, at the end of your @file{configure.in}
file, needs to be modified in two ways:

@example
AC_OUTPUT([@var{existing configuration files} intl/Makefile po/Makefile.in],
[@var{existing additional actions}])
@end example

The modification to the first argument to @code{AC_OUTPUT} asks
for substitution in the @file{intl/} and @file{po/} directories.
Note the @samp{.in} suffix used for @file{po/} only.  This is because
the distributed file is really @file{po/Makefile.in.in}.

If you have suppressed the @file{intl/} subdirectory by calling
@code{gettextize} without @samp{--intl} option, then you don't need to
add @code{intl/Makefile} to the @code{AC_OUTPUT} line.

@end enumerate

@node config.guess, aclocal, configure.in, Adjusting Files
@subsection @file{config.guess}, @file{config.sub} at top level

If you don't have suppressed the @file{intl/} subdirectory,
you need to add the GNU @file{config.guess} and @file{config.sub} files
to your distribution.  They are needed because the @file{intl/} directory
has platform dependent support for determining the locale's character
encoding and therefore needs to identify the platform.

You can obtain the newest version of @file{config.guess} and
@file{config.sub} from @file{ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/config/}.
Less recent versions are also contained in the GNU @code{automake} and
GNU @code{libtool} packages.

Normally, @file{config.guess} and @file{config.sub} are put at the
top level of a distribution.  But it is also possible to put them in a
subdirectory, altogether with other configuration support files like
@file{install-sh}, @file{ltconfig}, @file{ltmain.sh},
@file{mkinstalldirs} or @file{missing}.  All you need to do, other than
moving the files, is to add the following line to your
@file{configure.in}.

@example
AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR([@var{subdir}])
@end example

@node aclocal, acconfig, config.guess, Adjusting Files
@subsection @file{aclocal.m4} at top level
@cindex @file{aclocal.m4} file

If you do not have an @file{aclocal.m4} file in your distribution,
the simplest is to concatenate the files @file{codeset.m4},
@file{gettext.m4}, @file{glibc21.m4}, @file{iconv.m4}, @file{isc-posix.m4},
@file{lcmessage.m4}, @file{lib-ld.m4}, @file{lib-link.m4},
@file{lib-prefix.m4}, @file{progtest.m4} from GNU @code{gettext}'s
@file{m4/} directory into a single file.  If you have suppressed the
@file{intl/} directory, only @file{gettext.m4}, @file{iconv.m4},
@file{progtest.m4} need to be concatenated.

If you already have an @file{aclocal.m4} file, then you will have
to merge the said macro files into your @file{aclocal.m4}.  Note that if
you are upgrading from a previous release of GNU @code{gettext}, you
should most probably @emph{replace} the macros (@code{AM_GNU_GETTEXT},
etc.), as they usually
change a little from one release of GNU @code{gettext} to the next.
Their contents may vary as we get more experience with strange systems
out there.

These macros check for the internationalization support functions
and related informations.  Hopefully, once stabilized, these macros
might be integrated in the standard Autoconf set, because this
piece of @code{m4} code will be the same for all projects using GNU
@code{gettext}.

@node acconfig, Makefile, aclocal, Adjusting Files
@subsection @file{acconfig.h} at top level
@cindex @file{acconfig.h} file

Earlier GNU @code{gettext} releases required to put definitions for
@code{ENABLE_NLS}, @code{HAVE_GETTEXT} and @code{HAVE_LC_MESSAGES},
@code{HAVE_STPCPY}, @code{PACKAGE} and @code{VERSION} into an
@file{acconfig.h} file.  This is not needed any more; you can remove
them from your @file{acconfig.h} file unless your package uses them
independently from the @file{intl/} directory.

@node Makefile, src/Makefile, acconfig, Adjusting Files
@subsection @file{Makefile.in} at top level

Here are a few modifications you need to make to your main, top-level
@file{Makefile.in} file.

@enumerate
@item
Add the following lines near the beginning of your @file{Makefile.in},
so the @samp{dist:} goal will work properly (as explained further down):

@example
PACKAGE = @@PACKAGE@@
VERSION = @@VERSION@@
@end example

@item
Add file @file{ABOUT-NLS} to the @code{DISTFILES} definition, so the file gets
distributed.

@item
Wherever you process subdirectories in your @file{Makefile.in}, be sure
you also process dir subdirectories @samp{intl} and @samp{po}.  Special
rules in the @file{Makefiles} take care for the case where no
internationalization is wanted.

If you are using Makefiles, either generated by automake, or hand-written
so they carefully follow the GNU coding standards, the effected goals for
which the new subdirectories must be handled include @samp{installdirs},
@samp{install}, @samp{uninstall}, @samp{clean}, @samp{distclean}.

Here is an example of a canonical order of processing.  In this
example, we also define @code{SUBDIRS} in @code{Makefile.in} for it
to be further used in the @samp{dist:} goal.

@example
SUBDIRS = doc intl lib src po
@end example

Note that you must arrange for @samp{make} to descend into the
@code{intl} directory before descending into other directories containing
code which make use of the @code{libintl.h} header file.  For this
reason, here we mention @code{intl} before @code{lib} and @code{src}.

@item
A delicate point is the @samp{dist:} goal, as both
@file{intl/Makefile} and @file{po/Makefile} will later assume that the
proper directory has been set up from the main @file{Makefile}.  Here is
an example at what the @samp{dist:} goal might look like:

@example
distdir = $(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)
dist: Makefile
	rm -fr $(distdir)
	mkdir $(distdir)
	chmod 777 $(distdir)
	for file in $(DISTFILES); do \
	  ln $$file $(distdir) 2>/dev/null || cp -p $$file $(distdir); \
	done
	for subdir in $(SUBDIRS); do \
	  mkdir $(distdir)/$$subdir || exit 1; \
	  chmod 777 $(distdir)/$$subdir; \
	  (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $@@) || exit 1; \
	done
	tar chozf $(distdir).tar.gz $(distdir)
	rm -fr $(distdir)
@end example

@end enumerate

@node src/Makefile, lib/gettext.h, Makefile, Adjusting Files
@subsection @file{Makefile.in} in @file{src/}

Some of the modifications made in the main @file{Makefile.in} will
also be needed in the @file{Makefile.in} from your package sources,
which we assume here to be in the @file{src/} subdirectory.  Here are
all the modifications needed in @file{src/Makefile.in}:

@enumerate
@item
In view of the @samp{dist:} goal, you should have these lines near the
beginning of @file{src/Makefile.in}:

@example
PACKAGE = @@PACKAGE@@
VERSION = @@VERSION@@
@end example

@item
If not done already, you should guarantee that @code{top_srcdir}
gets defined.  This will serve for @code{cpp} include files.  Just add
the line:

@example
top_srcdir = @@top_srcdir@@
@end example

@item
You might also want to define @code{subdir} as @samp{src}, later
allowing for almost uniform @samp{dist:} goals in all your
@file{Makefile.in}.  At list, the @samp{dist:} goal below assume that
you used:

@example
subdir = src
@end example

@item
The @code{main} function of your program will normally call
@code{bindtextdomain} (see @pxref{Triggering}), like this:

@example
bindtextdomain (@var{PACKAGE}, LOCALEDIR);
@end example

To make LOCALEDIR known to the program, add the following lines to
Makefile.in:

@example
datadir = @@datadir@@
localedir = $(datadir)/locale
DEFS = -DLOCALEDIR=\"$(localedir)\" @@DEFS@@
@end example

Note that @code{@@datadir@@} defaults to @samp{$(prefix)/share}, thus
@code{$(localedir)} defaults to @samp{$(prefix)/share/locale}.

@item
You should ensure that the final linking will use @code{@@LIBINTL@@} or
@code{@@LTLIBINTL@@} as a library.  @code{@@LIBINTL@@} is for use without
@code{libtool}, @code{@@LTLIBINTL@@} is for use with @code{libtool}. An
easy way to achieve this is to manage that it gets into @code{LIBS}, like
this:

@example
LIBS = @@LIBINTL@@ @@LIBS@@
@end example

In most packages internationalized with GNU @code{gettext}, one will
find a directory @file{lib/} in which a library containing some helper
functions will be build.  (You need at least the few functions which the
GNU @code{gettext} Library itself needs.)  However some of the functions
in the @file{lib/} also give messages to the user which of course should be
translated, too.  Taking care of this, the support library (say
@file{libsupport.a}) should be placed before @code{@@LIBINTL@@} and
@code{@@LIBS@@} in the above example.  So one has to write this:

@example
LIBS = ../lib/libsupport.a @@LIBINTL@@ @@LIBS@@
@end example

@item
You should also ensure that directory @file{intl/} will be searched for
C preprocessor include files in all circumstances.  So, you have to
manage so both @samp{-I../intl} and @samp{-I$(top_srcdir)/intl} will
be given to the C compiler.

@item
Your @samp{dist:} goal has to conform with others.  Here is a
reasonable definition for it:

@example
distdir = ../$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir)
dist: Makefile $(DISTFILES)
	for file in $(DISTFILES); do \
	  ln $$file $(distdir) 2>/dev/null || cp -p $$file $(distdir); \
	done
@end example

@end enumerate

@node lib/gettext.h,  , src/Makefile, Adjusting Files
@subsection @file{gettext.h} in @file{lib/}
@cindex @file{gettext.h} file
@cindex turning off NLS support
@cindex disabling NLS

Internationalization of packages, as provided by GNU @code{gettext}, is
optional. It can be turned off in two situations:

@itemize @bullet
@item
When the installer has specified @samp{./configure --disable-nls}. This
can be useful when small binaries are more important than features, for
example when building utilities for boot diskettes. It can also be useful
in order to get some specific C compiler warnings about code quality with
some older versions of GCC (older than 3.0).

@item
When the package does not include the @code{intl/} subdirectory, and the
libintl.h header (with its associated libintl library, if any) is not
already installed on the system, it is preferrable that the package builds
without internationalization support, rather than to give a compilation
error.
@end itemize

A C preprocessor macro can be used to detect these two cases. Usually,
when @code{libintl.h} was found and not explicitly disabled, the
@code{ENABLE_NLS} macro will be defined to 1 in the autoconf generated
configuration file (usually called @file{config.h}). In the two negative
situations, however, this macro will not be defined, thus it will evaluate
to 0 in C preprocessor expressions.

@cindex include file @file{libintl.h}
@file{gettext.h} is a convenience header file for conditional use of
@file{<libintl.h>}, depending on the @code{ENABLE_NLS} macro. If
@code{ENABLE_NLS} is set, it includes @file{<libintl.h>}; otherwise it
defines no-op substitutes for the libintl.h functions. We recommend
the use of @code{"gettext.h"} over direct use of @file{<libintl.h>},
so that portability to older systems is guaranteed and installers can
turn off internationalization if they want to. In the C code, you will
then write

@example
#include "gettext.h"
@end example

@noindent
instead of

@example
#include <libintl.h>
@end example

The location of @code{gettext.h} is usually in a directory containing
auxiliary include files. In many GNU packages, there is a directory
@file{lib/} containing helper functions; @file{gettext.h} fits there.
In other packages, it can go into the @file{src} directory.

Do not install the @code{gettext.h} file in public locations. Every
package that needs it should contain a copy of it on its own.

@node autoconf macros,  , Adjusting Files, Maintainers
@section Autoconf macros for use in @file{configure.in}
@cindex autoconf macros for @code{gettext}

GNU @code{gettext} installs macros for use in a package's
@file{configure.in} or @file{configure.ac}.
@xref{Top, , Introduction, autoconf, The Autoconf Manual}.
The primary macro is, of course, @code{AM_GNU_GETTEXT}.

@menu
* AM_GNU_GETTEXT::              AM_GNU_GETTEXT in @file{gettext.m4}
* AM_ICONV::                    AM_ICONV in @file{iconv.m4}
@end menu

@node AM_GNU_GETTEXT, AM_ICONV, autoconf macros, autoconf macros
@subsection AM_GNU_GETTEXT in @file{gettext.m4}

@amindex AM_GNU_GETTEXT
The @code{AM_GNU_GETTEXT} macro tests for the presence of the GNU gettext
function family in either the C library or a separate @code{libintl}
library (shared or static libraries are both supported) or in the package's
@file{intl/} directory.

@code{AM_GNU_GETTEXT} accepts up to three optional arguments. The general
syntax is

@example
AM_GNU_GETTEXT([@var{intlsymbol}], [@var{needsymbol}], [@var{intldir}])
@end example

@var{intlsymbol} can be one of @samp{external}, @samp{no-libtool},
@samp{use-libtool}. The default (if it is not specified or empty) is
@samp{no-libtool}. @var{intlsymbol} should be @samp{external} for packages
with no @file{intl/} directory, and @samp{no-libtool} or @samp{use-libtool}
for packages with an @file{intl/} directory. If @var{intlsymbol} is
@samp{use-libtool}, then a libtool library
@code{$(top_builddir)/intl/libintl.la} will be created (shared and/or static,
depending on @code{--@{enable,disable@}-@{shared,static@}} and on the
presence of @code{AM_DISABLE_SHARED}). If @var{intlsymbol} is
@samp{no-libtool}, a static library
@code{$(top_builddir)/intl/libintl.a} will be created.

If @var{needsymbol} is specified and is @samp{need-ngettext}, then GNU
gettext implementations (in libc or libintl) without the @code{ngettext()}
function will be ignored.

@var{intldir} is used to find the intl libraries.  If empty, the value
@samp{$(top_builddir)/intl/} is used.

The @code{AM_GNU_GETTEXT} macro determines whether GNU gettext is
available and should be used. If so, it sets the @code{USE_NLS} variable
to @samp{yes}; it defines @code{ENABLE_NLS} to 1 in the autoconf
generated configuration file (usually called @file{config.h}); it sets
the variables @code{LIBINTL} and @code{LTLIBINTL} to the linker options
for use in a Makefile (@code{LIBINTL} for use without libtool,
@code{LTLIBINTL} for use with libtool); it adds an @samp{-I} option to
@code{CPPFLAGS} if necessary. In the negative case, it sets
@code{USE_NLS} to @samp{no}; it sets @code{LIBINTL} and @code{LTLIBINTL}
to empty and doesn't change @code{CPPFLAGS}.

The complexities that @code{AM_GNU_GETTEXT} deals with are the following:

@itemize @bullet
@item
@cindex @code{libintl} library
Some operating systems have @code{gettext} in the C library, for example
glibc. Some have it in a separate library @code{libintl}. GNU @code{libintl}
might have been installed as part of the GNU @code{gettext} package.

@item
GNU @code{libintl}, if installed, is not necessarily already in the search
path (@code{CPPFLAGS} for the include file search path, @code{LDFLAGS} for
the library search path).

@item
Except for glibc, the operating system's native @code{gettext} cannot
exploit the GNU mo files, doesn't have the necessary locale dependency
features, and cannot convert messages from the catalog's text encoding
to the user's locale encoding.

@item
GNU @code{libintl}, if installed, is not necessarily already in the
run time library search path. To avoid the need for setting an environment
variable like @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}, the macro adds the appropriate
run time search path options to the @code{LIBINTL} and @code{LTLIBINTL}
variables. This works on most systems, but not on some operating systems
with limited shared library support, like SCO.

@item
GNU @code{libintl} relies on POSIX @code{iconv}. The macro checks for
linker options needed to use iconv and appends them to the @code{LIBINTL}
and @code{LTLIBINTL} variables.
@end itemize

@node AM_ICONV,  , AM_GNU_GETTEXT, autoconf macros
@subsection AM_ICONV in @file{iconv.m4}

@amindex AM_ICONV
The @code{AM_ICONV} macro tests for the presence of the POSIX
@code{iconv} function family in either the C library or a separate
@code{libiconv} library. If found, it sets the @code{am_cv_func_iconv}
variable to @samp{yes}; it defines @code{HAVE_ICONV} to 1 in the autoconf
generated configuration file (usually called @file{config.h}); it defines
@code{ICONV_CONST} to @samp{const} or to empty, depending on whether the
second argument of @code{iconv()} is of type @samp{const char **} or
@samp{char **}; it sets the variables @code{LIBICONV} and
@code{LTLIBICONV} to the linker options for use in a Makefile
(@code{LIBICONV} for use without libtool, @code{LTLIBICONV} for use with
libtool); it adds an @samp{-I} option to @code{CPPFLAGS} if
necessary. If not found, it sets @code{LIBICONV} and @code{LTLIBICONV} to
empty and doesn't change @code{CPPFLAGS}.

The complexities that @code{AM_ICONV} deals with are the following:

@itemize @bullet
@item
@cindex @code{libiconv} library
Some operating systems have @code{iconv} in the C library, for example
glibc. Some have it in a separate library @code{libiconv}, for example
OSF/1 or FreeBSD. Regardless of the operating system, GNU @code{libiconv}
might have been installed. In that case, it should be used instead of the
operating system's native @code{iconv}.

@item
GNU @code{libiconv}, if installed, is not necessarily already in the search
path (@code{CPPFLAGS} for the include file search path, @code{LDFLAGS} for
the library search path).

@item
GNU @code{libiconv} is binary incompatible with some operating system's
native @code{iconv}, for example on FreeBSD.  Use of an @file{iconv.h}
and @file{libiconv.so} that don't fit together would produce program
crashes.

@item
GNU @code{libiconv}, if installed, is not necessarily already in the
run time library search path. To avoid the need for setting an environment
variable like @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}, the macro adds the appropriate
run time search path options to the @code{LIBICONV} variable. This works
on most systems, but not on some operating systems with limited shared
library support, like SCO.
@end itemize

@file{iconv.m4} is distributed with the GNU gettext package because
@file{gettext.m4} relies on it.

@node Programming Languages, Conclusion, Maintainers, Top
@chapter Other Programming Languages

While the presentation of @code{gettext} focuses mostly on C and
implicitly applies to C++ as well, its scope is far broader than that:
Many programming languages, scripting languages and other textual data
like GUI resources or package descriptions can make use of the gettext
approach.

@menu
* Language Implementors::       The Language Implementor's View
* Programmers for other Languages::  The Programmer's View
* Translators for other Languages::  The Translator's View
* Maintainers for other Languages::  The Maintainer's View
* List of Programming Languages::  Individual Programming Languages
* List of Data Formats::        Internationalizable Data
@end menu

@node Language Implementors, Programmers for other Languages, Programming Languages, Programming Languages
@section The Language Implementor's View
@cindex programming languages
@cindex scripting languages

All programming and scripting languages that have the notion of strings
are eligible to supporting @code{gettext}.  Supporting @code{gettext}
means the following:

@enumerate
@item
You should add to the language a syntax for translatable strings.  In
principle, a function call of @code{gettext} would do, but a shorthand
syntax helps keeping the legibility of internationalized programs.  For
example, in C we use the syntax @code{_("string")}, in bash we use the
syntax @code{$"string"}, and in GNU awk we use the shorthand
@code{_"string"}.

@item
You should arrange that evaluation of such a translatable string at
runtime calls the @code{gettext} function, or performs equivalent
processing.

@item
Similarly, you should make the functions @code{ngettext},
@code{dcgettext}, @code{dcngettext} available from within the language.
These functions are less often used, but are nevertheless necessary for
particular purposes: @code{ngettext} for correct plural handling, and
@code{dcgettext} and @code{dcngettext} for obeying other locale
environment variables than @code{LC_MESSAGES}, such as @code{LC_TIME} or
@code{LC_MONETARY}.  For these latter functions, you need to make the
@code{LC_*} constants, available in the C header @code{<locale.h>},
referenceable from within the language, usually either as enumeration
values or as strings.

@item
You should allow the programmer to designate a message domain, either by
making the @code{textdomain} function available from within the
language, or by introducing a magic variable called @code{TEXTDOMAIN}.
Similarly, you should allow the programmer to designate where to search
for message catalogs, by providing access to the @code{bindtextdomain}
function.

@item
You should either perform a @code{setlocale (LC_ALL, "")} call during
the startup of your language runtime, or allow the programmer to do so.
Remember that gettext will act as a no-op if the @code{LC_MESSAGES} and
@code{LC_CTYPE} locale facets are not both set.

@item
A programmer should have a way to extract translatable strings from a
program into a PO file.  The GNU @code{xgettext} program is being
extended to support very different programming languages.  Please
contact the GNU @code{gettext} maintainers to help them doing this.  If
the string extractor is best integrated into your language's parser, GNU
@code{xgettext} can function as a front end to your string extractor.

@item
The language's library should have a string formatting facility where
the arguments of a format string are denoted by a positional number or a
name.  This is needed because for some languages and some messages with
more than one substitutable argument, the translation will need to
output the substituted arguments in different order.  @xref{c-format}.

@item
If the language has more than one implementation, and not all of the
implementations use @code{gettext}, but the programs should be portable
across implementations, you should provide a no-i18n emulation, that
makes the other implementations accept programs written for yours,
without actually translating the strings.

@item
To help the programmer in the task of marking translatable strings,
which is usually performed using the Emacs PO mode, you are welcome to
contact the GNU @code{gettext} maintainers, so they can add support for
your language to @file{po-mode.el}.
@end enumerate

On the implementation side, three approaches are possible, with
different effects on portability and copyright:

@itemize @bullet
@item
You may integrate the GNU @code{gettext}'s @file{intl/} directory in
your package, as described in @ref{Maintainers}.  This allows you to
have internationalization on all kinds of platforms.  Note that when you
then distribute your package, it legally falls under the GNU General
Public License, and the GNU project will be glad about your contribution
to the Free Software pool.

@item
You may link against GNU @code{gettext} functions if they are found in
the C library.  For example, an autoconf test for @code{gettext()} and
@code{ngettext()} will detect this situation.  For the moment, this test
will succeed on GNU systems and not on other platforms.  No severe
copyright restrictions apply.

@item
You may emulate or reimplement the GNU @code{gettext} functionality.
This has the advantage of full portability and no copyright
restrictions, but also the drawback that you have to reimplement the GNU
@code{gettext} features (such as the @code{LANGUAGE} environment
variable, the locale aliases database, the automatic charset conversion,
and plural handling).
@end itemize

@node Programmers for other Languages, Translators for other Languages, Language Implementors, Programming Languages
@section The Programmer's View

For the programmer, the general procedure is the same as for the C
language.  The Emacs PO mode supports other languages, and the GNU
@code{xgettext} string extractor recognizes other languages based on the
file extension or a command-line option.  In some languages,
@code{setlocale} is not needed because it is already performed by the
underlying language runtime.

@node Translators for other Languages, Maintainers for other Languages, Programmers for other Languages, Programming Languages
@section The Translator's View

The translator works exactly as in the C language case.  The only
difference is that when translating format strings, she has to be aware
of the language's particular syntax for positional arguments in format
strings.

@node Maintainers for other Languages, List of Programming Languages, Translators for other Languages, Programming Languages
@section The Maintainer's View

For the maintainer, the general procedure differs from the C language
case in two ways.

@itemize @bullet
@item
For those languages that don't use GNU gettext, the @file{intl/} directory
is not needed and can be omitted.  This means that the maintainer calls the
@code{gettextize} program without the @samp{--intl} option, and that he
invokes the @code{AM_GNU_GETTEXT} autoconf macro via
@samp{AM_GNU_GETTEXT([external])}.

@item
If only a single programming language is used, the @code{XGETTEXT_OPTIONS}
variable in @file{po/Makevars} (@pxref{po/Makevars}) should be adjusted to
match the @code{xgettext} options for that particular programming language.
If the package uses more than one programming language with @code{gettext}
support, it becomes necessary to change the POT file construction rule
in @file{po/Makefile.in.in}. It is recommended to make one @code{xgettext}
invocation per programming language, each with the options appropriate for
that language, and to combine the resulting files using @code{msgcat}.
@end itemize

@node List of Programming Languages, List of Data Formats, Maintainers for other Languages, Programming Languages
@section Individual Programming Languages

@c Here is a list of programming languages, as used for Free Software projects
@c on SourceForge/Freshmeat, as of February 2002. Those supported by gettext
@c are marked with a star.
@c   C                       3580     *
@c   Perl                    1911
@c   C++                     1379     *
@c   Java                    1200     *
@c   PHP                     1051
@c   Python                   613     *
@c   Unix Shell               357
@c   Tcl                      266     *
@c   SQL                      174
@c   JavaScript               118
@c   Assembly                 108
@c   Scheme                    51
@c   Ruby                      47
@c   Lisp                      45     *
@c   Objective C               39     *
@c   PL/SQL                    29
@c   Fortran                   25
@c   Ada                       24
@c   Delphi                    22
@c   Awk                       19     *
@c   Pascal                    19
@c   ML                        19
@c   Eiffel                    17
@c   Emacs-Lisp                14     *
@c   Zope                      14
@c   ASP                       12
@c   Forth                     12
@c   Cold Fusion               10
@c   Haskell                    9
@c   Visual Basic               9
@c   C#                         6
@c   Smalltalk                  6
@c   Basic                      5
@c   Erlang                     5
@c   Modula                     5
@c   Object Pascal              5     *
@c   Rexx                       5
@c   Dylan                      4
@c   Prolog                     4
@c   APL                        3
@c   PROGRESS                   2
@c   Euler                      1
@c   Euphoria                   1
@c   Pliant                     1
@c   Simula                     1
@c   XBasic                     1
@c   Logo                       0
@c   Other Scripting Engines   49
@c   Other                    116

@menu
* C::                           C, C++, Objective C
* sh::                          sh - Shell Script
* bash::                        bash - Bourne-Again Shell Script
* Python::                      Python
* Common Lisp::                 GNU clisp - Common Lisp
* clisp C::                     GNU clisp C sources
* Emacs Lisp::                  Emacs Lisp
* librep::                      librep
* Smalltalk::                   GNU Smalltalk
* Java::                        Java
* gawk::                        GNU awk
* Pascal::                      Pascal - Free Pascal Compiler
* wxWindows::                   wxWindows library
* YCP::                         YCP - YaST2 scripting language
* Tcl::                         Tcl - Tk's scripting language
* Perl::                        Perl
* PHP::                         PHP Hypertext Preprocessor
* Pike::                        Pike
@end menu

@node C, sh, List of Programming Languages, List of Programming Languages
@subsection C, C++, Objective C
@cindex C and C-like languages

@table @asis
@item RPMs
gcc, gpp, gobjc, glibc, gettext

@item File extension
For C: @code{c}, @code{h}.
@*For C++: @code{C}, @code{c++}, @code{cc}, @code{cxx}, @code{cpp}, @code{hpp}.
@*For Objective C: @code{m}.

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{_("abc")}

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{gettext}, @code{dgettext}, @code{dcgettext}, @code{ngettext},
@code{dngettext}, @code{dcngettext}

@item textdomain
@code{textdomain} function

@item bindtextdomain
@code{bindtextdomain} function

@item setlocale
Programmer must call @code{setlocale (LC_ALL, "")}

@item Prerequisite
@code{#include <libintl.h>}
@*@code{#include <locale.h>}
@*@code{#define _(string) gettext (string)}

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
Use

@item Extractor
@code{xgettext -k_}

@item Formatting with positions
@code{fprintf "%2$d %1$d"} (POSIX but not C 99)

@item Portability
autoconf (gettext.m4) and #if ENABLE_NLS

@item po-mode marking
yes
@end table

@node sh, bash, C, List of Programming Languages
@subsection sh - Shell Script
@cindex shell scripts

@table @asis
@item RPMs
bash, gettext

@item File extension
@code{sh}

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}, @code{'abc'}, @code{abc}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{"`gettext "abc"`"}

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@pindex gettext
@pindex ngettext
@code{gettext}, @code{ngettext} programs

@item textdomain
@vindex TEXTDOMAIN@r{, environment variable}
environment variable @code{TEXTDOMAIN}

@item bindtextdomain
@vindex TEXTDOMAINDIR@r{, environment variable}
environment variable @code{TEXTDOMAINDIR}

@item setlocale
automatic

@item Prerequisite
---

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
use

@item Extractor
---

@item Formatting with positions
---

@item Portability
---

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

@node bash, Python, sh, List of Programming Languages
@subsection bash - Bourne-Again Shell Script
@cindex bash

@table @asis
@item RPMs
bash 2.0 or newer, gettext

@item File extension
@code{sh}

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}, @code{'abc'}, @code{abc}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{$"abc"}

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@pindex gettext
@pindex ngettext
@code{gettext}, @code{ngettext} programs

@item textdomain
@vindex TEXTDOMAIN@r{, environment variable}
environment variable @code{TEXTDOMAIN}

@item bindtextdomain
@vindex TEXTDOMAINDIR@r{, environment variable}
environment variable @code{TEXTDOMAINDIR}

@item setlocale
automatic

@item Prerequisite
---

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
use

@item Extractor
@code{bash --dump-po-strings}

@item Formatting with positions
---

@item Portability
---

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

@node Python, Common Lisp, bash, List of Programming Languages
@subsection Python
@cindex Python

@table @asis
@item RPMs
python

@item File extension
@code{py}

@item String syntax
@code{'abc'}, @code{u'abc'}, @code{r'abc'}, @code{ur'abc'},
@*@code{"abc"}, @code{u"abc"}, @code{r"abc"}, @code{ur"abc"},
@*@code{'''abc'''}, @code{u'''abc'''}, @code{r'''abc'''}, @code{ur'''abc'''},
@*@code{"""abc"""}, @code{u"""abc"""}, @code{r"""abc"""}, @code{ur"""abc"""}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{_('abc')} etc.

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{gettext.gettext}, @code{gettext.dgettext}, also @code{ugettext}

@item textdomain
@code{gettext.textdomain} function, or
@code{gettext.install(@var{domain})} function

@item bindtextdomain
@code{gettext.bindtextdomain} function, or
@code{gettext.install(@var{domain},@var{localedir})} function

@item setlocale
not used by the gettext emulation

@item Prerequisite
@code{import gettext}

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
emulate. Bug: uses only the first found .mo file, not all of them

@item Extractor
@code{xgettext}

@item Formatting with positions
@code{'...%(ident)d...' % @{ 'ident': value @}}

@item Portability
fully portable

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

@node Common Lisp, clisp C, Python, List of Programming Languages
@subsection GNU clisp - Common Lisp
@cindex Common Lisp
@cindex Lisp
@cindex clisp

@table @asis
@item RPMs
clisp 2.28 or newer

@item File extension
@code{lisp}

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{(_ "abc")}, @code{(ENGLISH "abc")}

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{i18n:gettext}, @code{i18n:ngettext}

@item textdomain
@code{i18n:textdomain}

@item bindtextdomain
@code{i18n:textdomaindir}

@item setlocale
automatic

@item Prerequisite
---

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
use

@item Extractor
@code{xgettext -k_ -kENGLISH}

@item Formatting with positions
@code{format "~1@@*~D ~0@@*~D"}

@item Portability
On platforms without gettext, no translation.

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

@node clisp C, Emacs Lisp, Common Lisp, List of Programming Languages
@subsection GNU clisp C sources
@cindex clisp C sources

@table @asis
@item RPMs
clisp

@item File extension
@code{d}

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{ENGLISH ? "abc" : ""}
@*@code{GETTEXT("abc")}
@*@code{GETTEXTL("abc")}

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{clgettext}, @code{clgettextl}

@item textdomain
---

@item bindtextdomain
---

@item setlocale
automatic

@item Prerequisite
@code{#include "lispbibl.c"}

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
use

@item Extractor
@code{clisp-xgettext}

@item Formatting with positions
@code{fprintf "%2$d %1$d"} (POSIX but not C 99)

@item Portability
On platforms without gettext, no translation.

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

@node Emacs Lisp, librep, clisp C, List of Programming Languages
@subsection Emacs Lisp
@cindex Emacs Lisp

@table @asis
@item RPMs
emacs, xemacs

@item File extension
@code{el}

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{(_"abc")}

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{gettext}, @code{dgettext} (xemacs only)

@item textdomain
@code{domain} special form (xemacs only)

@item bindtextdomain
@code{bind-text-domain} function (xemacs only)

@item setlocale
automatic

@item Prerequisite
---

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
use

@item Extractor
@code{xgettext}

@item Formatting with positions
@code{format "%2$d %1$d"}

@item Portability
Only XEmacs. Without @code{I18N3} defined at build time, no translation.

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

@node librep, Smalltalk, Emacs Lisp, List of Programming Languages
@subsection librep
@cindex @code{librep} Lisp

@table @asis
@item RPMs
librep 0.15.3 or newer

@item File extension
@code{jl}

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{(_"abc")}

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{gettext}

@item textdomain
@code{textdomain} function

@item bindtextdomain
@code{bindtextdomain} function

@item setlocale
---

@item Prerequisite
@code{(require 'rep.i18n.gettext)}

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
use

@item Extractor
@code{xgettext}

@item Formatting with positions
@code{format "%2$d %1$d"}

@item Portability
On platforms without gettext, no translation.

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

@node Smalltalk, Java, librep, List of Programming Languages
@subsection GNU Smalltalk
@cindex Smalltalk

@table @asis
@item RPMs
smalltalk

@item File extension
@code{st}

@item String syntax
@code{''abc''}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{NLS? ''abc''}
@*@code{self? ''abc''}

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{LcMessagesDomain>>#at:}, @code{LcMessagesDomain>>#at:plural:with:}

@item textdomain
@code{LcMessages>>#?} (returns a @code{LcMessagesDomain} object).@*
Example: @code{Locale default messages ? 'gettext'}

@item bindtextdomain
@code{LcMessages>>#domain:directory:} (returns a @code{LcMessagesDomain}
object)

@item setlocale
You can obtain any @code{Locale} object from @code{Locale} class methods
such as @code{#fromString:} or @code{#default}.@*
Example: @code{Locale default messages} gives the @code{LcMessages}
object for the default locale.

@item Prerequisite
The gettext code is contained in the @file{I18N} package.

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
emulate

@item Extractor
---

@item Formatting with positions
@code{'%1 %2' bindWith: 'Hello' with: 'world'}

@item Portability
fully portable

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

@node Java, gawk, Smalltalk, List of Programming Languages
@subsection Java
@cindex Java

@table @asis
@item RPMs
java, java2

@item File extension
@code{java}

@item String syntax
"abc"

@item gettext shorthand
_("abc")

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{GettextResource.gettext}, @code{GettextResource.ngettext}

@item textdomain
---, use @code{ResourceBundle.getResource} instead

@item bindtextdomain
---, use CLASSPATH instead

@item setlocale
automatic

@item Prerequisite
---

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
---, uses a Java specific message catalog format

@item Extractor
@code{xgettext -k_}

@item Formatting with positions
@code{MessageFormat.format "@{1,number@} @{0,number@}"}

@item Portability
fully portable

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

Before marking strings as internationalizable, uses of the string
concatenation operator need to be converted to @code{MessageFormat}
applications. For example, @code{"file "+filename+" not found"} becomes
@code{MessageFormat.format("file @{0@} not found", new Object[] @{ filename @})}.
Only after this is done, can the strings be marked and extracted.

GNU gettext uses the native Java internationalization mechanism, namely
@code{ResourceBundle}s. To convert a PO file to a ResourceBundle, the
@code{msgfmt} program can be used with the option @code{--java} or
@code{--java2}. To convert a ResourceBundle back to a PO file, the
@code{msgunfmt} program can be used with the option @code{--java}.

Two different programmatic APIs can be used to access ResourceBundles.
Note that both APIs work with all kinds of ResourceBundles, whether
GNU gettext generated classes, or other @code{.class} or @code{.properties}
files.

@enumerate
@item
The @code{java.util.ResourceBundle} API.

In particular, its @code{getString} function returns a string translation.
Note that a missing translation yields a @code{MissingResourceException}.

This has the advantage of being the standard API. And it does not require
any additional libraries, only the @code{msgfmt} generated @code{.class}
files. But it cannot do plural handling, even if the resource was generated
from a PO file with plural handling.

@item
The @code{gnu.gettext.GettextResource} API.

Reference documentation in Javadoc 1.1 style format
is in the @uref{javadoc1/tree.html,javadoc1 directory} and
in Javadoc 2 style format
in the @uref{javadoc2/index.html,javadoc2 directory}.

Its @code{gettext} function returns a string translation. Note that when
a translation is missing, the @var{msgid} argument is returned unchanged.

This has the advantage of having the @code{ngettext} function for plural
handling.

@cindex @code{libintl} for Java
To use this API, one needs the @code{libintl.jar} file which is part of
the GNU gettext package and distributed under the LGPL.
@end enumerate

@node gawk, Pascal, Java, List of Programming Languages
@subsection GNU awk
@cindex awk
@cindex gawk

@table @asis
@item RPMs
gawk 3.1 or newer

@item File extension
@code{awk}

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{_"abc"}

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{dcgettext}, missing @code{dcngettext} in gawk-3.1.0

@item textdomain
@code{TEXTDOMAIN} variable

@item bindtextdomain
@code{bindtextdomain} function

@item setlocale
automatic, but missing @code{setlocale (LC_MESSAGES, "")} in gawk-3.1.0

@item Prerequisite
---

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
use

@item Extractor
@code{xgettext}

@item Formatting with positions
@code{printf "%2$d %1$d"} (GNU awk only)

@item Portability
On platforms without gettext, no translation.  On non-GNU awks, you must
define @code{dcgettext}, @code{dcngettext} and @code{bindtextdomain}
yourself.

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

@node Pascal, wxWindows, gawk, List of Programming Languages
@subsection Pascal - Free Pascal Compiler
@cindex Pascal
@cindex Free Pascal
@cindex Object Pascal

@table @asis
@item RPMs
fpk

@item File extension
@code{pp}, @code{pas}

@item String syntax
@code{'abc'}

@item gettext shorthand
automatic

@item gettext/ngettext functions
---, use @code{ResourceString} data type instead

@item textdomain
---, use @code{TranslateResourceStrings} function instead

@item bindtextdomain
---, use @code{TranslateResourceStrings} function instead

@item setlocale
automatic, but uses only LANG, not LC_MESSAGES or LC_ALL

@item Prerequisite
@code{@{$mode delphi@}} or @code{@{$mode objfpc@}}@*@code{uses gettext;}

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
emulate partially

@item Extractor
@code{ppc386} followed by @code{xgettext} or @code{rstconv}

@item Formatting with positions
@code{uses sysutils;}@*@code{format "%1:d %0:d"}

@item Portability
?

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

The Pascal compiler has special support for the @code{ResourceString} data
type. It generates a @code{.rst} file. This is then converted to a @code{.pot}
file by use of @code{xgettext} or @code{rstconv}. At runtime, a @code{.mo}
file corresponding to translations of this @code{.pot} file can be loaded
using the @code{TranslateResourceStrings} function in the @code{gettext} unit.

@node wxWindows, YCP, Pascal, List of Programming Languages
@subsection wxWindows library
@cindex @code{wxWindows} library

@table @asis
@item RPMs
wxGTK, gettext

@item File extension
@code{cpp}

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{_("abc")}

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{wxLocale::GetString}, @code{wxGetTranslation}

@item textdomain
@code{wxLocale::AddCatalog}

@item bindtextdomain
@code{wxLocale::AddCatalogLookupPathPrefix}

@item setlocale
@code{wxLocale::Init}, @code{wxSetLocale}

@item Prerequisite
@code{#include <wx/intl.h>}

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
emulate, see @code{include/wx/intl.h} and @code{src/common/intl.cpp}

@item Extractor
@code{xgettext}

@item Formatting with positions
---

@item Portability
fully portable

@item po-mode marking
yes
@end table

@node YCP, Tcl, wxWindows, List of Programming Languages
@subsection YCP - YaST2 scripting language
@cindex YCP
@cindex YaST2 scripting language

@table @asis
@item RPMs
libycp, libycp-devel, yast2-core-translator

@item File extension
@code{ycp}

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{_("abc")}

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{_()} with 1 or 3 arguments

@item textdomain
@code{textdomain} statement

@item bindtextdomain
---

@item setlocale
---

@item Prerequisite
---

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
use maps instead

@item Extractor
@code{xgettext}

@item Formatting with positions
@code{sformat "%2 %1"}

@item Portability
fully portable

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

@node Tcl, Perl, YCP, List of Programming Languages
@subsection Tcl - Tk's scripting language
@cindex Tcl
@cindex Tk's scripting language

@table @asis
@item RPMs
tcl

@item File extension
@code{tcl}

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{[_ "abc"]}

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{::msgcat::mc}

@item textdomain
---

@item bindtextdomain
---, use @code{::msgcat::mcload} instead

@item setlocale
automatic, uses LANG, but ignores LC_MESSAGES and LC_ALL

@item Prerequisite
@code{package require msgcat}
@*@code{proc _ @{s@} @{return [::msgcat::mc $s]@}}

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
---, uses a Tcl specific message catalog format

@item Extractor
@code{xgettext -k_}

@item Formatting with positions
@code{format "%2\$d %1\$d"}

@item Portability
fully portable

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

Before marking strings as internationalizable, substitutions of variables
into the string need to be converted to @code{format} applications. For
example, @code{"file $filename not found"} becomes
@code{[format "file %s not found" $filename]}.
Only after this is done, can the strings be marked and extracted.
After marking, this example becomes
@code{[format [_ "file %s not found"] $filename]} or
@code{[msgcat::mc "file %s not found" $filename]}. Note that the
@code{msgcat::mc} function implicitly calls @code{format} when more than one
argument is given.

@node Perl, PHP, Tcl, List of Programming Languages
@subsection Perl
@cindex Perl

@table @asis
@item RPMs
perl, perl-gettext

@item File extension
@code{pl}, @code{PL}

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}

@item gettext shorthand
---

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{gettext}, @code{dgettext}, @code{dcgettext}

@item textdomain
@code{textdomain} function

@item bindtextdomain
@code{bindtextdomain} function

@item setlocale
Use @code{setlocale (LC_ALL, "");}

@item Prerequisite
@code{use POSIX;}
@*@code{use Locale::gettext;}

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
use

@item Extractor
?

@item Formatting with positions
---

@item Portability
?

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

@node PHP, Pike, Perl, List of Programming Languages
@subsection PHP Hypertext Preprocessor
@cindex PHP

@table @asis
@item RPMs
mod_php4, phplib, phpdoc

@item File extension
@code{php}, @code{php3}, @code{php4}

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}

@item gettext shorthand
@code{_("abc")}

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{gettext}, @code{dgettext}, @code{dcgettext}

@item textdomain
@code{textdomain} function

@item bindtextdomain
@code{bindtextdomain} function

@item setlocale
@code{setlocale} function

@item Prerequisite
---

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
use

@item Extractor
---

@item Formatting with positions
---

@item Portability
On platforms without gettext, the functions are not available.

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

@node Pike,  , PHP, List of Programming Languages
@subsection Pike
@cindex Pike

@table @asis
@item RPMs
roxen

@item File extension
@code{pike}

@item String syntax
@code{"abc"}

@item gettext shorthand
---

@item gettext/ngettext functions
@code{gettext}, @code{dgettext}, @code{dcgettext}

@item textdomain
@code{textdomain} function

@item bindtextdomain
@code{bindtextdomain} function

@item setlocale
@code{setlocale} function

@item Prerequisite
@code{import Locale.Gettext;}

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext
use

@item Extractor
---

@item Formatting with positions
---

@item Portability
On platforms without gettext, the functions are not available.

@item po-mode marking
---
@end table

@c This is the template for new languages.
@ignore

@ node
@ subsection 

@table @asis
@item RPMs

@item File extension

@item String syntax

@item gettext shorthand

@item gettext/ngettext functions

@item textdomain

@item bindtextdomain

@item setlocale

@item Prerequisite

@item Use or emulate GNU gettext

@item Extractor

@item Formatting with positions

@item Portability

@item po-mode marking
@end table

@end ignore

@node List of Data Formats,  , List of Programming Languages, Programming Languages
@section Internationalizable Data

Here is a list of other data formats which can be internationalized
using GNU gettext.

@menu
* POT::                         POT - Portable Object Template
* RST::                         Resource String Table
* Glade::                       Glade - GNOME user interface description
@end menu

@node POT, RST, List of Data Formats, List of Data Formats
@subsection POT - Portable Object Template

@table @asis
@item RPMs
gettext

@item File extension
@code{pot}, @code{po}

@item Extractor
@code{xgettext}
@end table

@node RST, Glade, POT, List of Data Formats
@subsection Resource String Table
@cindex RST

@table @asis
@item RPMs
fpk

@item File extension
@code{rst}

@item Extractor
@code{xgettext}, @code{rstconv}
@end table

@node Glade,  , RST, List of Data Formats
@subsection Glade - GNOME user interface description

@table @asis
@item RPMs
glade, libglade, xml-i18n-tools

@item File extension
@code{glade}

@item Extractor
@code{xgettext}, @code{libglade-xgettext}
@end table

@c This is the template for new data formats.
@ignore

@ node
@ subsection 

@table @asis
@item RPMs

@item File extension

@item Extractor
@end table

@end ignore

@node Conclusion, Language Codes, Programming Languages, Top
@chapter Concluding Remarks

We would like to conclude this GNU @code{gettext} manual by presenting
an history of the Translation Project so far.  We finally give
a few pointers for those who want to do further research or readings
about Native Language Support matters.

@menu
* History::                     History of GNU @code{gettext}
* References::                  Related Readings
@end menu

@node History, References, Conclusion, Conclusion
@section History of GNU @code{gettext}
@cindex history of GNU @code{gettext}

Internationalization concerns and algorithms have been informally
and casually discussed for years in GNU, sometimes around GNU
@code{libc}, maybe around the incoming @code{Hurd}, or otherwise
(nobody clearly remembers).  And even then, when the work started for
real, this was somewhat independently of these previous discussions.

This all began in July 1994, when Patrick D'Cruze had the idea and
initiative of internationalizing version 3.9.2 of GNU @code{fileutils}.
He then asked Jim Meyering, the maintainer, how to get those changes
folded into an official release.  That first draft was full of
@code{#ifdef}s and somewhat disconcerting, and Jim wanted to find
nicer ways.  Patrick and Jim shared some tries and experimentations
in this area.  Then, feeling that this might eventually have a deeper
impact on GNU, Jim wanted to know what standards were, and contacted
Richard Stallman, who very quickly and verbally described an overall
design for what was meant to become @code{glocale}, at that time.

Jim implemented @code{glocale} and got a lot of exhausting feedback
from Patrick and Richard, of course, but also from Mitchum DSouza
(who wrote a @code{catgets}-like package), Roland McGrath, maybe David
MacKenzie, Fran@,{c}ois Pinard, and Paul Eggert, all pushing and
pulling in various directions, not always compatible, to the extent
that after a couple of test releases, @code{glocale} was torn apart.

While Jim took some distance and time and became dad for a second
time, Roland wanted to get GNU @code{libc} internationalized, and
got Ulrich Drepper involved in that project.  Instead of starting
from @code{glocale}, Ulrich rewrote something from scratch, but
more conformant to the set of guidelines who emerged out of the
@code{glocale} effort.  Then, Ulrich got people from the previous
forum to involve themselves into this new project, and the switch
from @code{glocale} to what was first named @code{msgutils}, renamed
@code{nlsutils}, and later @code{gettext}, became officially accepted
by Richard in May 1995 or so.

Let's summarize by saying that Ulrich Drepper wrote GNU @code{gettext}
in April 1995.  The first official release of the package, including
PO mode, occurred in July 1995, and was numbered 0.7.  Other people
contributed to the effort by providing a discussion forum around
Ulrich, writing little pieces of code, or testing.  These are quoted
in the @code{THANKS} file which comes with the GNU @code{gettext}
distribution.

While this was being done, Fran@,{c}ois adapted half a dozen of
GNU packages to @code{glocale} first, then later to @code{gettext},
putting them in pretest, so providing along the way an effective
user environment for fine tuning the evolving tools.  He also took
the responsibility of organizing and coordinating the Translation
Project.  After nearly a year of informal exchanges between people from
many countries, translator teams started to exist in May 1995, through
the creation and support by Patrick D'Cruze of twenty unmoderated
mailing lists for that many native languages, and two moderated
lists: one for reaching all teams at once, the other for reaching
all willing maintainers of internationalized free software packages.

Fran@,{c}ois also wrote PO mode in June 1995 with the collaboration
of Greg McGary, as a kind of contribution to Ulrich's package.
He also gave a hand with the GNU @code{gettext} Texinfo manual.

In 1997, Ulrich Drepper released the GNU libc 2.0, which included the
@code{gettext}, @code{textdomain} and @code{bindtextdomain} functions.

In 2000, Ulrich Drepper added plural form handling (the @code{ngettext}
function) to GNU libc.  Later, in 2001, he released GNU libc 2.2.x,
which is the first free C library with full internationalization support.

Ulrich being quite busy in his role of General Maintainer of GNU libc,
he handed over the GNU @code{gettext} maintenance to Bruno Haible in
2000.  Bruno added the plural form handling to the tools as well, added
support for UTF-8 and CJK locales, and wrote a few new tools for
manipulating PO files.

@node References,  , History, Conclusion
@section Related Readings
@cindex related reading
@cindex bibliography

Eugene H. Dorr (@file{dorre@@well.com}) maintains an interesting
bibliography on internationalization matters, called
@cite{Internationalization Reference List}, which is available as:
@example
ftp://ftp.ora.com/pub/examples/nutshell/ujip/doc/i18n-books.txt
@end example

Michael Gschwind (@file{mike@@vlsivie.tuwien.ac.at}) maintains a
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) list, entitled @cite{Programming for
Internationalisation}.  This FAQ discusses writing programs which
can handle different language conventions, character sets, etc.;
and is applicable to all character set encodings, with particular
emphasis on @w{ISO 8859-1}.  It is regularly published in Usenet
groups @file{comp.unix.questions}, @file{comp.std.internat},
@file{comp.software.international}, @file{comp.lang.c},
@file{comp.windows.x}, @file{comp.std.c}, @file{comp.answers}
and @file{news.answers}.  The home location of this document is:
@example
ftp://ftp.vlsivie.tuwien.ac.at/pub/8bit/ISO-programming
@end example

Patrick D'Cruze (@file{pdcruze@@li.org}) wrote a tutorial about NLS
matters, and Jochen Hein (@file{Hein@@student.tu-clausthal.de}) took
over the responsibility of maintaining it.  It may be found as:
@example
ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/Linux/utils/nls/catalogs/Incoming/...
     ...locale-tutorial-0.8.txt.gz
@end example
@noindent
This site is mirrored in:
@example
ftp://ftp.ibp.fr/pub/linux/sunsite/
@end example

A French version of the same tutorial should be findable at:
@example
ftp://ftp.ibp.fr/pub/linux/french/docs/
@end example
@noindent
together with French translations of many Linux-related documents.

@node Language Codes, Country Codes, Conclusion, Top
@appendix Language Codes
@cindex language codes
@cindex ISO 639

The @w{ISO 639} standard defines two character codes for many languages.
All abbreviations for languages used in the Translation Project should
come from this standard.

@table @samp
@include iso-639.texi
@end table

@node Country Codes, Program Index, Language Codes, Top
@appendix Country Codes
@cindex country codes
@cindex ISO 3166

The @w{ISO 3166} standard defines two character codes for many countries
and territories.  All abbreviations for countries used in the Translation
Project should come from this standard.

@table @samp
@include iso-3166.texi
@end table

@node Program Index, Option Index, Country Codes, Top
@unnumbered Program Index

@printindex pg

@node Option Index, Variable Index, Program Index, Top
@unnumbered Option Index

@printindex op

@node Variable Index, PO Mode Index, Option Index, Top
@unnumbered Variable Index

@printindex vr

@node PO Mode Index, Autoconf Macro Index, Variable Index, Top
@unnumbered PO Mode Index

@printindex em

@node Autoconf Macro Index, Index, PO Mode Index, Top
@unnumbered Autoconf Macro Index

@printindex am

@node Index,  , Autoconf Macro Index, Top
@unnumbered General Index

@printindex cp

@contents
@bye

@c Local variables:
@c texinfo-column-for-description: 32
@c End: